People Management - online.wiseup.com

People Management

Wise U

p Online

ChaptersChapters

The Role of People Management p. 3

1

3 Words of Affirmation p. 59

2 Personality Profiles p. 31

4 Quality Time p. 86

5 Acts of Service p. 116

6 Tangible Gifts p. 142

7 Physical Touch p. 168

8 Grammar Guide p. 196Arquivo Interativo. Interações no menu ao lado, topo e base das páginas, e nas indicações do Grammar Guide no final de cada lesson.

The role of people managementThe Role of People Management

1

Chapter 1

4< voltar para o índice

Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabulary Activities

The job market is a dynamic environment. Companies compete to deliver the best products or services in the most diverse areas. And strategic people management plays a key role in this process. Companies that could notice this have been leading transformation processes in the job market.

If you have ever participated in a selection process for a medium-sized or large enterprise, the f irst contact you had with the company was probably through the Human Resources or the HR Department. This department organizes and follows through with the entire process of hiring and integrating new employees into the team. But it hasn’t always been like that.

In a not-too-distant past, the famous HR, which was also known as the “Personnel Department,” performed strictly accounting tasks. The main function of the Personnel Department was to organize the payroll and be an interface between the company’s employees and the f inancial sector.

Over the years, this department has become more important and started to deal with issues related to employee performance. HR then began to promote presentations and training and to collaborate in the structural organization of the company and its various departments. But this new approach to HR had a strictly economic outlook. The focus was on increasing the performance of teams and the company as a whole, be it by promoting the integration of new employees or creating career and wage plans for them.

THE ROLE OF PEOPLE MANAGEMENT

In this chapter, you will learn about verbs and nouns related to the work environment, as well as word formation. You will also learn some idiomatic expressions.

Now, look at the script of The Role of People Management.

Part 1.

Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

5

These strategies are part of the concept of “people management”, which is characterized by working with a set of dynamic and interactive processes. For example, when an employee is promoted, their integration into the new position takes place at the same time as the process of hiring someone new to take on the role that they performed before. In turn, this hiring process happens at the same time this new employee is integrated into the team. You cannot separate these processes. They are fully interactive and dynamic.

Over time, companies started to realize that this strictly economic view of the staff was incomplete. Even after working on smooth integration processes, offering training and a career plan, some employees still left the company to search for better opportunities. In other words, all the investment made in the development of that professional was lost when they resigned.

Then, it was possible to realize that it was also necessary to consider people’s feelings and demands. From that moment on, people management began to have strategic importance for companies by mediating the relationship between the company’s objectives and the personal objectives of its employees.

This is the most current focus on strategic people management. It helps to retain talents and is a signif icant factor in the company’s competitiveness. It is no wonder that the Human Resources manager has become a part of the board of directors of the largest companies in the market. With all this change in perspective, it is easy to realize that, nowadays, a humanized look makes all the difference.

O PAPEL DA GESTÃO DE PESSOAS

O mercado de trabalho é um ambiente dinâmico. As empresas competem para entregar os melhores produtos ou serviços nas mais diversas áreas. E a gestão estratégica de pessoas tem um papel fundamental nesse processo. Empresas que perceberam isso estão liderando processos de transformação no mercado de trabalho.

Se você já participou de um processo seletivo para uma empresa de médio ou grande porte, provavelmente, o primeiro contato que você teve com ela foi por meio do Departamento de Recursos Humanos (RH). Esse departamento organiza e acompanha todo o processo de contratação e integração dos novos colaboradores na equipe. Mas nem sempre foi assim.

< voltar para o índice


6

Num passado não muito distante, o famoso “RH”, que também era conhecido como “Departamento de Pessoal”, realizava tarefas estritamente contábeis. A principal função do Departamento de Pessoal era organizar a folha de pagamento e conectar os funcionários da empresa ao setor f inanceiro.

Ao longo dos anos, esse departamento ganhou mais importância e passou a lidar também com questões relacionadas ao desempenho dos funcionários. Então, o RH passou a promover apresentações, treinamentos e a colaborar na organização estrutural da empresa e de seus diversos departamentos. Mas essa nova abordagem de RH tinha um olhar estritamente econômico. Ela se centrava em aumentar o desempenho das equipes e da empresa como um todo, fosse promovendo a integração dos novos funcionários, fosse criando planos de carreira e de salário para eles.

Essas estratégias fazem parte do conceito de “gestão de pessoas”, que se caracteriza por trabalhar com um conjunto de processos dinâmicos e interativos. Por exemplo: quando um funcionário é promovido, a integração dele na nova função ocorre ao mesmo tempo em que ocorre a contratação de alguém para realizar a função que ele desempenhava antes. Por sua vez, esse processo de contratação ocorre ao mesmo tempo em que este novo funcionário é integrado à equipe. Não é possível separar esses processos. Eles são totalmente interativos e dinâmicos.

Com o tempo, as empresas foram percebendo que esse olhar estritamente econômico sobre a equipe de colaboradores estava incompleto. Mesmo fazendo uma boa integração, oferecendo treinamentos e um plano de carreira, alguns colaboradores ainda deixavam a empresa em busca de oportunidades melhores. Em outras palavras, todo o investimento feito no desenvolvimento daquele profissional f icava perdido quando ele pedia demissão.

Então, foi possível perceber que era preciso considerar também os sentimentos e as demandas das pessoas. A partir daí, a gestão de pessoas passou a ter uma importância estratégica para as empresas ao mediar a relação entre os objetivos da empresa e os objetivos pessoais dos colaboradores.

Este é o foco mais atual da gestão estratégica de pessoas. Ela ajuda na retenção dos talentos e é um grande diferencial na competitividade da empresa. Não à toa, o gestor de Recursos Humanos passou a fazer parte do conselho de diretores das maiores empresas do mercado. Com toda essa mudança de perspectiva, f ica fácil perceber que, nos tempos atuais, um olhar humanizado faz toda a diferença.


Video Script VocabularyChapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities

< voltar para o índice7

In this chapter, you will learn about people management and understand the fundamental role that HR, or Human Resources, has in companies nowadays. It has not always been like that. It is actually the result of an evolution that took place over time.

In the beginning, HR’s role was quite simple. Take a look:

The main function of the Personnel Department was to organize the payroll.A principal função do Departamento de Pessoal era organizar a folha de pagamento.

Payroll is a compound word that refers to the activity of managing salary payments for workers in a company. A compound word is a word that is formed from two other words. In the case of payroll, it is a word formed from pay and roll.

There is another compound word composed with the word pay. Observe:

On her payday, Lucy took her parents out for dinner.No dia do seu pagamento, Lucy levou seus pais para jantar.

Payday is formed with the words pay and day. It means the day on which you get your salary.

The noun pay can also be used by itself. Check it out:

Michael spent all his pay on new sneakers. O Michael gastou todo o seu salário em tênis novos.

In this context, pay is a noun that means the regular money given to someone in exchange for regular work.

Pay can be a noun, but it can also be a verb. This is common in English: many words are written and pronounced equally, but are used as different word classes. When this happens, their function in the sentence changes.

Part 2.

Chapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script

8

Observe an example of pay used as a verb:

Michael paid 2,000 dollars for new sneakers. That’s my month’s salary!O Michael pagou 2.000 dólares por tênis novos. Esse é o meu salário de um mês!

Paid is the verb to pay in the simple past. This verb means to give someone money in exchange for a product or service.

The word salary refers to the money someone receives regularly in exchange for their service. In most contexts, salary and pay are used interchangeably. And the word wage usually refers to the amount paid by the hour. In that sense, wage is different from salary and pay.

In general, salary and pay refer to a fixed value, paid for the service regularly provided by a professional in a company. They usually come at the end or at the beginning of the month. And wage refers to money paid according to the number of hours the person has worked, usually paid weekly.

In the beginning, HR’s main responsibility was making these payments. Over time, this role changed. In other words:

HR began to promote presentations and training.O RH começou a promover apresentações e treinamentos.

In the previous sentence, to promote means to help or encourage the development of an activity. However, this verb can have different meanings, according to the context.

For example:

Lucy’s hard work paid off. She was finally promoted.O trabalho duro da Lucy valeu a pena. Ela foi f inalmente promovida.

In this context, the verb to promote means to raise someone to a higher or more important position or rank in a company or organization. It is commonly used in the past participle in a passive construction. The verb to promote is from the same word family as the noun promotion.

Check it out:



9

Lucy’s hard work paid off: she finally got the promotion she wanted.O trabalho duro da Lucy valeu a pena: ela f inalmente conseguiu a promoção

que queria.

In this context, promotion means a move to a more important job or position in a company or organization.

In a different context, promotion can also refer to an activity directed to help selling a product or service, such as free gifts sent by companies to help increase sales. These gifts can be described as promotional, an adjective that refers to something intended to be publicized to increase sales or the public’s attention.

When a brand or a store promotes a product, they increase their value in the market. Another way of making a brand or a product gain visibility is by decreasing its retail price. The period during which this happens is called a sale. As in:

Lilian loves a good sale. She always buys lots of things on Black Friday.A Lilian adora uma boa promoção. Ela sempre compra muitas coisas na

Black Friday.

There are other expressions formed with the word sale that have different meanings. When a product is on sale, it means it is available to be bought for a lower price. When a product is for sale, it means it is available to buy.

Compare the examples:

I didn’t plan to buy so many books, but they were on sale.Eu não planejava comprar tantos livros, mas eles estavam em promoção.

Nicole fell in love with the car. So, she asked the driver if it was for sale.A Nicole se apaixonou pelo carro. Então, ela perguntou ao motorista se ele

estava à venda.

To be on sale means being sold at a lower price than usual, for a specif ic period, whereas for sale means being available for people to buy. The correct structure is to be for sale. So, there is a difference between promotion, a sale, to be on sale, and to be for sale.



10

The words promotion, promotional, and to promote are from the same word family. Word family is a group of related words that are formed from the same radical. The verb to employ, which can mean to hire, belongs to the same family as the words employee, employer, employed and unemployed.

Observe:

Now observe these words in sentences:

WORD FAMILY

Verb

to employempregar

Nouns

employee funcionário/colaborador

employerempregador

Adjectives

employedempregado

unemployeddesempregado

The company employs fifty people.A empresa emprega cinquenta pessoas.

Employs is the verb to employ conjugated in the simple present. In the example, it means to hire. By adding the suff ix -ee to it, you have a new word from the same word family as that of to employ:

Sarah is a good employee. She is dedicated to her work and wants to learn.A Sarah é uma boa funcionária. Ela é dedicada ao seu trabalho e quer aprender.



The word employee is formed by employ + -ee. When this suffix is added to a verb, it conveys the idea of passivity, that is, of someone who receives the action expressed by the verb. In this case, the employee is the one who gets the job.

By changing the suff ix, you have a new word from the same word family but with a different meaning:

Employers have to promote a healthy work environment.Os empregadores têm que promover um ambiente de trabalho saudável.

Employer, on the other hand, is a word formed by adding the suff ix -er to the verb to employ. Employer refers to a person, a company, or an organization that hires people. In this case, the suff ix -er indicates who performs the action expressed by the verb.

You can also form an adjective with the suff ix -ed:

Luke is employed, but his wife is unemployed. This sometimes creates tension.O Luke está empregado, mas a esposa dele está desempregada. Isso às vezes gera tensão.

Employed is an adjective that refers to the person who has a job. Its antonym, unemployed, means not having a job. This adjective is formed with the prefix un-.

Unemployment depends on the f luctuations of the job market. This term refers to the quantity and type of jobs available.

For example:

market = grocery storemercado

flower marketmercado de f lores

fish marketmercado de peixes

flea marketmercado de pulgas

TYPES OF MARKET

The job market is a dynamic environment. O mercado de trabalho é um ambiente dinâmico.

In this sentence, the word market pairs up with the word job, but, by itself, market can mean the same as grocery store. And it can also be used in other contexts. Observe:



As you can see, depending on the accompanying word, market will refer to different contexts.

The job market is dynamic; therefore, HR needs to understand that the processes within a company are also dynamic. A good example is when a change occurs in the employees’ chart, be it in cases of resignation or promotion. Check it out:

When an employee is promoted, their integration into the new position takes place at the same time as the process of hiring someone new to

take on the role they performed before.Quando um funcionário é promovido, a integração dele na nova função ocorre ao mesmo tempo em que ocorre a contratação de alguém para

realizar a função que ele desempenhava antes.

To take place is an idiomatic expression that means to happen. It is formed with the verb to take, which, by itself, can mean to grab or to carry. This verb can be followed by other particles and then become a phrasal verb. For instance, to take on. In this sentence, to take on means to assume or accept a new post.

In the business context, to take on conveys yet another meaning. Take a look:

Our company’s goal is to take on at least 50 new people.O objetivo da nossa empresa é contratar pelo menos 50 novas pessoas.

To take on, in this case, means to hire, to employ.

After I was promoted to regional manager, my career really took off.Depois que eu fui promovida a gerente regional, minha carreira

realmente decolou.

The particle used to form the phrasal verb will have an impact on its meaning. So, the verb to take coupled with the particle off will form a phrasal verb with a completely different meaning from take on. Look:



The phrasal verb to take off, conjugated in the simple past as took off, is used f iguratively in the example, and it means to progress or to improve.

The improvement of employees became one of HR’s responsibilities, and the department started working on the process of rearranging and training the employees. But, even so, companies started to realize that this was not enough:

Even after offering training and a career plan, some employees still left to search for better opportunities.

Mesmo depois de oferecer treinamento e um plano de carreira, alguns colaboradores ainda iam embora em busca de oportunidades melhores.

In this sentence, trains is a verb that means to teach the tools or necessary knowledge so that someone can perform a specif ic job.

The word train comes from the same word family as trainee, which is formed with the suff ix -ee. The trainee is the apprentice, the one who is trained to perform some kind of work. By adding the suff ix -er to the end of the verb to train, we get trainer, the one in charge of training someone else.

It’s also possible to think about training in the context of sports. For instance:

In the previous example, the word training refers to the necessary process to develop a specif ic qualif ication. It is a noun formed from the verb to train and the suff ix -ing.

The word train can also be a verb:

The company trains the team to deal with frustrated customers.A empresa treina a equipe para lidar com clientes frustrados.

The soccer players trained a lot for the final. Os jogadores de futebol treinaram muito para a f inal.

In this case, the verb to train, in the simple past, means preparing yourself for a specif ic event. The preposition for is used to refer to the event the soccer players are preparing for. In this same context, the verb to practice can also be used. For instance:

The team needs to practice more to win the championship.O time precisa treinar mais para ganhar o campeonato.



Here, the context no longer involves sports, but music. The verb to practice has the same meaning as in the sentence seen before.

In this sentence, the verb to play means to perform a piece of music on an instrument; in this case, the guitar. Notice that we use the definite article the before the instrument.

But the verb to play can also be used to talk about sports. Take a look:

Carol plays the guitar really well. She practices every day.A Carol toca violão muito bem. Ela pratica todo dia.

Anna’s sister plays soccer every week.A irmã da Anna joga futebol toda semana.

In this sentence, the verb to play means to take part or compete in a sport or a game. In this case, you do not use an article as you did in the case of musical instruments. But when referring to physical activity or exercising in the gym, a different verb must be used. Take a look:

To practice means to do a repetitive and regular effort to develop a certain skill or knowledge. This verb can be applied to skills other than sports. For example:

Lucy works out every day, even on Sundays. A Lucy malha todo dia, até aos domingos.

The phrasal verb to work out means to train in the gym. Although it is composed by the verb to work, it has nothing to do with working in exchange for a salary.

As seen previously, the verb to play can be used when referring to a musical instrument or a physical activity. Depending on the context, this verb can have other meanings. For example:

Ted asked the DJ to play his favorite song.O Ted pediu para o DJ tocar sua música preferida.

Strategic people management plays a key role in this process.A gestão estratégica de pessoas desempenha um papel fundamental neste processo.



In the f irst sentence, the verb to play means to reproduce a song or piece of music.

But to play a role means to perform or to have a specif ic function. The word key can refer to the object used to unlock doors and safes, but, in this sentence, it is used as an adjective which means the same as essential.

The word play is present in your daily life more often than you know it. For instance:

When you listen to a song on a streaming platform, you press the play button. Quando você escuta uma música em uma plataforma de streaming, você aperta o

botão play.

In this case, the word play has nothing to do with having a role or practicing sports. It refers to reproducing a song.

This word can also be used in expressions, such as:

My grandmother is not well, her memory is playing tricks on her.Minha avó não está bem; a memória dela está enganando a ela.

The expression to play tricks on someone means to fool someone, to deceive them. The meaning of the verb to play has completely changed in this context.

Let’s see another expression with the verb to play:

Derek really wants a promotion at work. For that, he has to play the game.O Derek quer muito uma promoção no trabalho. Para isso, ele tem que seguir as regras.

To play the game means to conform to a behavior that follows an expected or established pattern. It also means to follow the rules. In this case, it is not about literally playing a game, neither dancing to any song. They are metaphorical expressions, used in a f igurative sense.

Now you know some verbs and nouns related to the work environment, as well as word formation. You’ve also learned

some idiomatic expressions.


Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script


A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.

B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.

( 1 ) funcionário

( 2 ) empregador

( 3 ) desempregado

( 4 ) enganar alguém

( 5 ) tocar uma música

( 6 ) seguir as regras

( 7 ) desempenhar um papel

( 8 ) malhar

( 9 ) jogar futebol

( 10 ) contratar

( 11 ) mercado de trabalho

( 12 ) mercado

( ) to play tricks on somebody

( ) to play a role

( ) employer

( ) job market

( ) to play soccer

( ) unemployed

( ) grocery store

( ) employee

( ) to take on

( ) to play the game

( ) to work out

( ) to play a song

1. The soccer players a lot for the final. Os jogadores de futebol treinaram muito para a f inal.

2. The team needs more to win the championship. O time precisa treinar mais para ganhar o campeonato.

3. Carol really well. She practices every day. A Carol toca violão muito bem. Ela pratica todo dia.

4. The company fifty people. A empresa emprega cinquenta pessoas.

Part 3.

Activities

Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script

Activity A – Answers1. employee2. employer3. unemployed4. to play tricks on somebody5. to play a song

6. to play the game7. to play a role8. to work out9. to play soccer10. to take on11. job market12. grocery store

Activity B – Answers1. trained2. to practice3. plays the guitar4. employs5. employee6. employed / unemployed

5. Sarah is a good . She is dedicated to her work and wants to learn. A Sarah é uma boa funcionária. Ela é dedicada ao seu trabalho e quer aprender.

6. Luke is but his wife is . This sometimes creates tension. O Luke está empregado, mas a esposa dele está desempregada. Isso às vezes gera tensão.


Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script


In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you saw some verbs that can be used to talk about corporate life. Some of them can also be used to form expressions. Now, you will learn about the structures of the simple present and the simple past, starting with the verb to be.

The verb to be has its own conjugation, which makes it different from all the other verbs.

The verb to be is used to express a temporary or permanent state or quality of a person, thing, place, or situation. For example:

The subject of this sentence is the job market, which represents the third person singular. Therefore, the verb to be is conjugated as is in the simple present.

In the simple present, the verb to be will have different conjugations depending on the subject. Take a look:

The job market is dynamic.O mercado de trabalho é dinâmico.

SIMPLE PRESENT – VERB TO BE

SINGULAR

I amEu sou / estou

You areVocê é / está

He isEle é / está

She isEla é / está

It isEle/Ela é / está

PLURAL

We areNós somos / estamos

You areVocês são / estão

They areEles/Elas são / estão

SIMPLE PRESENT - VERB TO BE

Part 4.

Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script

19

The verb to be also has its own conjugation in the simple past – was and were – and they will also vary according to the subject. Observe:

Here are some examples with to be in the simple past:

The subject of the f irst of the previous sentences is the main function of the Personnel Department. It is at the beginning of the sentence, and it represents the third person singular. The verb to be is conjugated accordingly, as was. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

The latter sentence is also in the simple past, and it follows the same structure. The subject, Diane and Robert, is at the beginning of the sentence. It represents the third person plural, so the verb to be is conjugated as were. What comes after the verb is the complement.

Both sentences follow the structure subject + main verb + complement.

This will be the structure of the aff irmative form of the verb to be both in the simple present and in the simple past. The conjugation changes, but the structure does not. Compare:

SINGULAR

I wasEu era / estava

You wereVocê era / estava

He wasEle era / estava

She wasEla era / estava

It wasEle/Ela era / estava

PLURAL

We wereNós éramos / estávamos

You wereVocês eram / estavam

They wereEles/Elas eram / estavam

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE

The main function of the Personnel Department was to organize the payroll.A função principal do Departamento de Pessoal era organizar a folha de pagamento.

Diane and Robert were late for the meeting.A Diane e o Robert estavam atrasados para a reunião.

SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE



20

The f irst sentence is in the simple present. The f irst element of the sentence is the subject, Sarah, followed by the verb and the complement. So, the structure is subject + main verb + complement.

It is the same structure as that of the second sentence, which is in the simple past. The subject is the f irst element to appear; Sarah, followed by the verb and the complement.

The verbs may have different conjugations, but the sentences follow the same structure.

This also happens in the negative form. Sentences in the simple present and in the simple past with to be as the main verb will follow the structure subject + main verb + not + complement:

SUBJECT + MAIN VERB + COMPLEMENTsujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Simple PresentSarah is a good employee.

A Sarah é uma boa funcionária.

Simple PastSarah was a good employee.

A Sarah era uma boa funcionária.

AFFIRMATIVE STRUCTURE

SUBJECT + MAIN VERB + NOT + COMPLEMENTsujeito + verbo principal + not + complemento

Simple presentSarah is not a good employee. She isn’t dedicated to her work.

A Sarah não é uma boa funcionária. Ela não é dedicada ao seu trabalho.

Simple pastSarah was not a good employee. She wasn’t dedicated to her work.

A Sarah não era uma boa funcionária. Ela não era dedicada ao seu trabalho.

NEGATIVE STRUCTURE – VERB TO BE

The f irst example is in the simple present. The f irst element of the sentences is the subject, Sarah in the f irst sentence, and she in the second sentence. Both are followed by the verb is and the negative particle not. At the end, there is the complement. So, the structure is subject + main verb + not + complement. The f irst sentence has the same structure, but with the contracted form of is not: isn’t.



21

The second example is in the simple past. The sentences begin with the subject. It is followed by the verb was and the negative particle not. At the end, there is the complement. Again, we have the structure subject + main verb + not + complement. The contracted form of was not is wasn’t.

Interrogative sentences with the verb to be also follow the same structure, be it in the simple present or in the simple past:

Both previous examples follow the same structure: the main verb is the f irst element of the sentence, followed by the subject and the complement.

Now, let’s see the structure of the aff irmative form of verbs other than to be.

Both in the simple present and in the simple past, the structure of the aff irmative form is the same you have seen for the verb to be, that is: subject + main verb + complement.

What changes is the conjugation of the main verb. These verbs are separated into two different groups: regular and irregular verbs.

In the simple present, it does not make any difference whether the verb is regular or irregular, because you will conjugate them using their base form, which is the infinitive without to. When the subject is the third person singular, the general rule is to add -S to the end of the base form. And that goes for regular and irregular verbs other than to be.

Let’s see some examples:

MAIN VERB + SUBJECT + COMPLEMENTverbo principal + sujeito + complemento

Is Sarah a good employee? Is she dedicated to work?A Sarah é uma boa funcionária? Ela é dedicada ao trabalho?

Was Sarah a good employee? Was she dedicated to work?A Sarah era uma boa funcionária? Ela era dedicada ao trabalho?

INTERROGATIVE STRUCTURE – VERB TO BE



Since the f irst and second sentences have subjects that represent the third person singular, the main verbs have an -S at the end. The third example has a subject that represents the third person plural, so the main verb remains in its base form. All three sentences follow the structure subject + main verb + complement.

On the other hand, in the simple past, it makes a difference if the verb is regular or irregular. For regular verbs, the general rule is to add the suff ix -ed to the base form. And that goes for all subjects. Check it out:


Last Christmas, we played board games all night.No Natal passado, nós jogamos jogos de tabuleiro a noite toda.

The team trained a lot for the final.O time treinou muito para a f inal.

The company hired twenty people last year. A empresa contratou vinte pessoas no ano passado.

SIMPLE PAST – REGULAR VERBS AFFIRMATIVE STRUCTURE


Lilian loves a good sale.A Lilian adora uma boa promoção.

Carol plays the piano really well.A Carol toca piano muito bem.

Derek and Dylan play soccer every day.O Derek e o Dylan jogam futebol todos os dias.

SIMPLE PRESENT – REGULAR VERBS AFFIRMATIVE STRUCTURE



All three examples are with regular verbs, so they are conjugated with -ed at the end: play + ed; train + ed; and hire + d. For this last verb, since it already ends in e, we just add -d. As you can see, even though the subject varied, the conjugation of the main verbs did not. Moreover, all three sentences follow the structure subject + main verb + complement.

The previous examples were with regular verbs. Now, let’s see what happens when the verb is irregular.

In the simple present, the fact that the verb is irregular does not affect its conjugation. The verb remains in the base form for all the subjects, and we add -S to the end of the base form of the verb only for the third person singular.

However, in the simple past, it makes a difference if the verb is irregular because there is no general rule when it comes to their conjugation. So, while regular verbs get the suff ix -ed, irregular verbs have different conjugations depending on the verb. Some are similar to the base form, while others suffer bigger changes.

Here is a list of verbs that do not suffer changes in spelling when conjugated in the simple past:

The verbs to cut and to put will have the same pronunciation whether in the infinitive or in the simple past. However, pay attention to the verb to read. There are no changes in spelling, but the pronunciation is quite different.

Other verbs will change completely. Take a look:

INFINITIVE

to cutcortar

to putcolocar

to readler

SIMPLE PAST

cut

put

read

IRREGULAR VERBS



As you can see, there is no general rule to form the simple past of irregular verbs.

The basic structure of the affirmative form will remain the same, even if the verb is irregular. So, the structure remains subject + main verb + complement, both in the simple present and in the simple past.

For example:


SIMPLE PRESENT – IRREGULAR VERBS

Michael spends all his pay on shopping.O Michael gasta todo o seu pagamento em compras.

SIMPLE PAST – IRREGULAR VERBS

Michael spent all his pay on new sneakers.O Michael gastou todo o seu pagamento em tênis novos.


INFINITIVE

to begincomeçar

to spendgastar

to takepegar

to goir

to haveter

SIMPLE PAST

began

spent

took

went

had

IRREGULAR VERBS



Both examples are with the irregular verb to spend. The f irst one is in the simple present. As the subject is equivalent to the third person singular, the conjugation is with -S at the end of the base form of the verb. The subject is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the main verb and the complement.

The second example is in the simple past. The structure of the sentence remains the same, but the conjugation of the verb changed: it is spent. It is not formed with -ed, as the regular verbs.

Here is another example, this time with the phrasal verb to take out. Observe that the particle out will be part of the verb, but it does not suffer changes with the conjugation. Note the example below:

The phrasal verb to take out is also irregular, because the verb to take is irregular. In the simple present, it makes no difference. It is still conjugated with an -S at the end, because the subject, Lucy, corresponds to the third person singular. The structure remains the same.

In the simple past, however, the phrasal verb to take out is conjugated as took out. Notice that the structure remains the same.

In the negative form, the fact that the verb is regular or irregular does not make a difference, be it in the simple present or in the simple past, because the main verbs will remain in their base form. That is because it is necessary to use the auxiliary verb do in the negative form. The auxiliary verb is the one that is conjugated, not the main verb.



Lucy takes her parents out for dinner every week. A Lucy leva seus pais para jantar toda semana.


On her payday, Lucy took her parents out for dinner.No dia do seu pagamento, Lucy levou seus pais para jantar.




In the simple present, the auxiliary verb is conjugated as does in the case of the third person singular. It will remain as do for the other persons.

In the simple past, the auxiliary verb is conjugated as did. All subjects use this same conjugation.

The particle not is placed after the auxiliary. Look at the structure and the examples:

SUBJECT + AUXILIARY VERB + NOT + MAIN VERB + COMPLEMENTsujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal + complemento

SIMPLE PRESENT – REGULAR VERBS

The company does not hire twenty people.A empresa não emprega vinte pessoas.

SIMPLE PAST – REGULAR VERBS

The company did not hire twenty people.A empresa não contratou vinte pessoas.

NEGATIVE FORM – OTHER VERBS

The verb to hire is regular. The f irst sentence is in the simple present. The structure is subject, which is the company, third person singular; therefore, the auxiliary verb is conjugated as does, which is followed by the particle not. Then, the main verb and complement.

The second sentence is in the simple past, and it follows the same structure, but the auxiliary verb is conjugated as did.

Note that in both previous examples the main verb remains in the base form.

Now, observe the following examples in the simple present and in the simple past with an irregular verb:



SUBJECT + AUXILIARY VERB + NOT + MAIN VERB + COMPLEMENTsujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal + complemento


Michael doesn’t spend all his pay on new sneakers.O Michael não gasta todo o seu pagamento em tênis novos.


Michael didn’t spend all his pay on new sneakers.O Michael não gastou todo o seu pagamento em tênis novos.

NEGATIVE FORM – OTHER VERBS

Although the verb to spend is irregular, there are no changes in the structure or conjugations of the verb in either the simple present or the simple past. We use the auxiliary verb do in the simple present, and did in the simple past, followed by the particle not. The main verb remains in the base form in both cases.

In the interrogative form of verbs other than to be, both in the simple present and in the simple past, the fact that the verb is regular or irregular does not affect the sentence structure.

That is because the interrogative form also uses an auxiliary verb; do in the simple present, and did in the simple past. Once more, the main verbs remain in their base form. And it is going to be this way for all subjects. The auxiliary verb will come at the beginning of the sentence before the subject. Check it out:

AUXILIARY VERB + SUBJECT + MAIN VERB + COMPLEMENTverbo auxiliar + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

SIMPLE PRESENT

Does the company hire twenty people?A empresa contrata vinte pessoas?

SIMPLE PAST

Did Michael spend all his pay on new sneakers?O Michael gastou todo seu pagamento em tênis novos?

INTERROGATIVE FORM – OTHER VERBSREGULAR AND IRREGULAR



In this chapter, you’ve learned the use of different verb forms: the simple present and the simple past. If you want

to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Irregular Verbs: Past Page 218Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 270Simple Past – Verb To Be Page 276Simple Present – Other Verbs 1Simple Present – Verb To Be Page 287

In the simple present, the auxiliary verb do is used with all subjects, except for the third person singular. In this case, the auxiliary verb is conjugated as does. In the simple past, did is used with all subjects, even with the third person singular.

It is important to understand the difference in the use of these verb forms. The simple present is used to make descriptions, talk about routine, habits, and general facts. The simple past is used to talk about situations or past actions already concluded, that is, actions that started and f inished at a certain moment in the past.


Grammar ActivitiesChapter 1 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script


Part 5.

Activities

Infinitive

to train

to have

to do

to hire

to cut

to go

to begin

to take

Simple Past

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

A. Complete the chart with the correct form of the verbs in the simple past.

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing verbs according to the translation.

1. Michael all his pay on new sneakers.

O Michael gastou todo o seu pagamento em tênis novos.

2. The company twenty people.

A empresa não contratou vinte pessoas.

3. Lilian a good sale.

A Lilian adora uma boa promoção.

4. Derek and Dylan soccer every day.

O Derek e o Dylan jogam futebol todos os dias.

Chapter 1 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities

1. spent2. did not / didn’t hire3. loves4. play5. is not / isn’t6. did not / didn’t spend

1. trained2. had3. did4. hired5. cut6. went7. began8. took

Activity A – AnswersActivity B – Answers

5. Sarah a good employee.

A Sarah não é uma boa funcionária.

6. Michael all his pay on new sneakers.

O Michael não gastou todo o seu pagamento em tênis novos.


Personality profilesPersonality Profiles

2

Chapter 2

32


Have you ever taken a moment to think about the fact that there are no two people alike? Even identical twins develop different personalities throughout their lives. In the workplace, this is even more evident. A company is composed of several different people, and each has its own way of acting and thinking.

Knowing the patterns behind the several personalities that are part of your company is fundamental to strategic people management. The behavioral theory known by the acronym DiSC defines four main personality types.

They are:

- The “Dominance” personality type- The “Influence” personality type- The “Steadiness” personality type- The “Conscientiousness” personality type

We can all present traits from all four profiles. But one of them will prevail over the others.

So, let’s get to know each of these profiles better, shall we?

The “Dominance” personality profile is direct and decisive. People who have this kind of personality possess a natural calling to achieve results. They’re strong-willed, independent, and brave. On the other hand, they can also be seen as arrogant, intolerant, and very demanding.

PERSONALITY PROFILES

In this chapter, you will learn about adjective formation and how to connect contrasting and similar ideas. You will also see some important vocabulary and grammar topics related to connecting ideas.

Now, look at the script of Personality Profiles.


Part 1.


33

The “Influence” personality profile is the most communicative—they’re people who know how to relate to others, they’re sociable and lively. They have an optimistic and positive outlook on life. Still, they can be unDiSCiplined, disorganized, and even insecure.

The “Steadiness” personality profile, as the name suggests, encompasses people who prefer stable environments. They’re people who like to collaborate, and they work well in a team; they’re loyal, patient, reliable, and diplomatic. However, in some situations, they may seem to be indifferent, unmotivated, and indecisive.

Lastly, the “Conscientiousness” personality profile encompasses people who know really well how to work according to the rules. They’re serious, DiSCreet, and organized. And they like to execute tasks the right way. Nevertheless, they can be seen as hesitant people who have a need for approval, and low self-esteem.

Now that you already know the strengths and weaknesses of each personality type, imagine the following situation:

A boss with a “Dominance” personality profile demands results from a salesperson with a “Steadiness” personality profile. If the boss follows his own personality type to communicate this demand, maybe it will all seem too rude to the salesperson. The fact that the boss is goal-oriented can be interpreted as a telling-off or unnecessary pressure.

However, if the boss is aware of his own personality type as well as the salesperson’s, it becomes possible to adjust the communication to a language that is friendlier to the salesperson’s personality type. By talking calmly and at the salesperson’s pace, the boss manages to keep that person integrated into the team and motivated to achieve the results—this keeps the work environment lighter and healthier.

Besides helping to adapt communication, this people management strategy allows the formation of more balanced teams, putting each employee one step closer to reaching their full potential.

For instance, it allows the boss to choose the employees that have a “Steadiness” type of personality for activities that require planning, while those with an “Influence” type of personality go to sales and customer service. People with a “Dominance” type of personality, who are goal-oriented, can do better in leadership positions than in customer service.



34

PERFIS COMPORTAMENTAIS

Você já parou para pensar no fato de que não existem duas pessoas iguais? Até mesmo gêmeos idênticos desenvolvem personalidades diferentes ao longo da vida. No ambiente de trabalho, isso f ica ainda mais evidente. Uma empresa é formada por diversas pessoas diferentes, e cada uma tem sua própria maneira de agir e pensar.

Conhecer os padrões por trás das diversas personalidades que fazem parte da sua empresa é fundamental para a gestão estratégica de pessoas. A teoria comportamental conhecida pela sigla DISC define quatro grandes tipos de perf il.

São eles:

- Perf il dominante- Perf il inf luente- Perf il estável- Perf il conforme

Todos nós podemos apresentar características dos quatro perf is. Porém, um deles irá prevalecer sobre os outros.

Vamos conhecer melhor cada um desses perf is?

O “perf il dominante” é direto e decidido. As pessoas com esse tipo de personalidade possuem uma vocação para atingir resultados. Elas são obstinadas, independentes e corajosas. Por outro lado, também podem ser vistas como arrogantes, intolerantes e muito exigentes.

O “perf il inf luente” é o mais comunicativo. São pessoas que sabem se relacionar com os outros, são amigáveis e extrovertidas. Possuem uma visão otimista e positiva sobre a vida. Apesar disso, podem ser inDiSCiplinadas, desorganizadas e até mesmo inseguras.

Each personality type will adjust better to a particular function in the company. Knowing them well and knowing how to work with each of them is vital in people management.

But is it enough?



O “perf il estável”, como o próprio nome sugere, engloba pessoas que preferem ambientes estáveis. São pessoas que gostam de colaborar e trabalham bem em equipe; são leais, pacientes, confiáveis e diplomáticas. Entretanto, em algumas situações podem parecer ser indiferentes, desmotivadas e indecisas.

Por último, o “perf il conforme” engloba pessoas que sabem muito bem trabalhar de acordo com as regras. São sérias, DiSCretas e organizadas. E gostam de fazer as tarefas do jeito correto. Mesmo assim, podem ser vistas como pessoas hesitantes, que possuem necessidade de aprovação, e baixa autoestima.

Agora que você já conhece melhor os pontos fortes e fracos de cada perf il, imagine a seguinte situação:

Um chefe de “perf il dominante” cobra resultados de um vendedor de “perf il estável”. Se o chefe seguir o seu próprio perf il para comunicar essa cobrança, talvez ela pareça muito rude ao vendedor. O foco em resultados que o chefe tem pode ser interpretado como uma bronca ou uma pressão desnecessária.

Contudo, se o chefe conhece seu próprio perf il bem como o do vendedor, torna-se possível adaptar a comunicação para uma linguagem mais amigável ao perf il do vendedor. Ao falar com mais calma e no ritmo do vendedor, o chefe consegue mantê-lo integrado ao time e motivado a alcançar os resultados—Isso mantém o ambiente de trabalho mais leve e saudável.

Além de ajudar a adaptar a comunicação, essa estratégia de gestão de pessoas permite montar equipes mais equilibradas, colocando cada colaborador mais próximo de atingir seu potencial.

Ela permite, por exemplo, selecionar profissionais de “perf il estável” para atividades de planejamento, enquanto os de “perf il inf luente” vão para vendas e atendimento ao cliente. Pessoas de “perf il dominante”, que têm foco em resultado, podem se sair melhor em cargos de liderança do que no atendimento.

Cada perf il comportamental vai se adaptar melhor a um determinado tipo de função na empresa. Conhecê-los bem e saber trabalhar com cada um deles é vital na gestão de pessoas.

Mas será que isso basta?



36

The DiSC personality profiles are a tool used by companies to better understand who their employees are, based on the most remarkable traces of their personalities.

There are four distinct profiles, each with its own characteristics.

People with a dominance profile tend to have these characteristics:

They’re strong-willed, independent, and brave.Elas são obstinadas, independentes e corajosas.

The adjective arrogant qualif ies a person who behaves in an unpleasant or impolite way by believing they are superior to others. Intolerant is an adjective formed by the union of the prefix in- and the adjective tolerant. An intolerant person is someone who does not accept ways of thinking and acting that are different from their own.

Demanding is an adjective referring to people who are not easily satisf ied, making others work hard or meet their high expectations. However, there is another meaning for this word when it refers to a task or function. For instance:

The adjective strong-willed means obstinate. It is composed of two words: strong and willed. Willed comes from the noun will, which means determination. You add -ed to form the adjective. Strong-willed is used to describe people who are very determined, obstinate. The two words are connected by a hyphen, forming one compound adjective.

Independent is another adjective. It refers to someone confident and capable of doing things by themselves, without advice or help from others. Brave is also an adjective. It means courageous. It defines a person who deals with situations with courage.

If, from one perspective, people who belong to the dominance profile are described as strong-willed, independent, and brave, on the other hand, they have other characteristics. Take a look:

They’re arrogant, intolerant, and very demanding.Elas são arrogantes, intolerantes e muito exigentes.


Part 2.


37

Doctor Sally has a demanding job as a neurosurgeon. A doutora Sally tem um trabalho desafiador como neurocirurgiã.

Here, demanding refers to something that requires a lot of skill and effort. The idea is that it is a hard, difficult job.

Demanding, intolerant, arrogant, as well as the words you saw in the previous examples, are adjectives. Adjectives are words that attribute a characteristic to something or someone.

There are several types of adjectives: compound adjectives, like strong-willed, and adjectives that come from another word, such as independent. And there are also simple adjectives, those that do not derive from any other word, like brave.

Simple adjectives are called simple because they do not derive from other words. Such as:

positivepositivo

ADJECTIVES

loyalleal

serioussério

Some of these adjectives can have different meanings according to the context.

For example:

rightcerto

vitalcrucial/vital

Mark is a serious person. He almost never jokes.O Mark é uma pessoa muito séria. Ele quase nunca faz brincadeiras.

In this context, serious qualif ies a person who does not laugh or make jokes. But the meaning of this adjective changes in another context:

My career is very serious to me.Minha carreira é muito séria para mim.



38

In this sentence, serious means important; therefore, here, they are synonyms. Serious can also mean honest:

You can trust Jack. He is a serious man.Você pode confiar no Jack. Ele é um homem sério.

They can have low self-esteem.Elas podem ter baixa autoestima.

Self-esteem is the feeling of being satisf ied with your own abilities, and that you deserve to be liked or respected. Here, notice they mentioned low self-esteem. Low is an adjective that can mean small in quantity. However, it can be used in another way; for example:

As you can see, the same word can have different meanings depending on the context.

There are other DiSC personality profiles. There is the conscientiousness profile. People in this category tend to perform their tasks with full attention and care. However, there is another side to this personality type:

She can’t hear the song; it’s too low!Ela não consegue ouvir a música; está muito baixa!

In this sentence, low refers to the volume of sound. It means that the sound is not loud enough for the person to hear. It’s also possible to use low to talk about height:

The thief entered the house because the wall is too low. O ladrão entrou na casa porque o muro é muito baixo.

Here, low means that the wall is not too far above the ground. However, this adjective cannot be used to refer to a person small in height. In this case, the correct adjective is short:

Sally is short for her age.A Sally é baixa para a idade dela.



39

Most of these adjectives can be used to describe the four personality types in both their strengths and weaknesses.

For example, people who f it the influence profile are seen the following way:

Low and short are simple adjectives, no matter the context in which they are used.

Besides the simple adjectives, there are also those formed with suffixes. Suff ixes are a combination of letters added to the end of a word to form another word. Some suff ixes are typically used to form adjectives. Observe:

-able

comfortableconfortável

communicativecomunicativo

disciplineddisciplinado

motivated motivado

demandingexigente/desafiador

optimistic otimista

reliableconfiável

decisivedecidido/decisivo

organizedorganizado

integratedintegrado

interestinginteressante

diplomaticdiplomático

ADJECTIVE FORMATION – SUFFIXES

-ive

-ed

-ing

-ic



The adjective optimistic refers to someone hoping for a better future. The adjective positive, in this case, means full of hope and confidence. These are the profile strengths, that is, the profile’s positive points.

As for the weaknesses, which are the negative points, they are described as undisciplined, which refers to someone who has no discipline. They are also described as disorganized, which defines someone with no sense of organization. And they can be insecure, which is a person who has no confidence.

Note that these last three adjectives are formed with the help of prefixes. Prefixes are letters added to the beginning of a word to form a new word.

Prefixes are sometimes used to make antonyms, that is, the opposite of another adjective. Observe:

They have an optimistic and positive outlook on life, but they can be undisciplined, disorganized, and insecure.

Elas têm uma visão positiva e otimista da vida, mas elas podem ser indisciplinadas, desorganizadas e inseguras.

Un-

undisciplinedindisciplinado

unmotivateddesmotivado

unnecessarydesnecessário

unknown desconhecido

insecureinseguro

indecisive indeciso/indecisivo

independentindependente

disciplineddisciplinado

motivatedmotivado

necessarynecessário

knownconhecido

secureseguro

decisivedecidido/decisivo

dependentdependente

ADJECTIVE FORMATION – PREFIXES

In-



However, antonyms are not always formed with a prefix. Sometimes, you will use a completely different word to mean the opposite of an adjective. For example:

Dis-

disorganizeddesorganizado

disloyaldesleal

nonintegratednão integrado

organizedorganizado

loyalleal

integratedintegrado

Non-

ANTONYMS

wrongerrado

negativenegativo

highalto

tallalto

right certo

positive positivo

lowbaixo

shortbaixo

Observe the adjectives in sentences:

The thief didn’t enter the house because the wall is high. O ladrão não entrou na casa porque o muro é alto.

In this case, we are talking about a wall. So, you will say this wall is high, it rises way above the f loor. In this context, the opposite is low.



But, you can also use high like this:

In this context of economics, high will also have as its opposite the adjective low. But when you refer to objects that are narrow and rise way above the f loor, such as trees, statues, or buildings, you will use tall.

For example:

The Empire State Building is really tall.O Empire State Building é muito alto.

To talk about people’s height, tall is the opposite of the adjective short.

These adjectives are used in descriptions that contrast with each other, as the intention is to describe the personality types both in their strengths and weaknesses. And, to contrast ideas in speech, it is necessary to use coherence and cohesion elements, or, as they can be called, connectors. It is also possible to use connectors to add information to what was previously said.

Have a look at the description of people that f it the dominance profile and observe the connectors:

The crisis led to high prices.A crise levou a preços altos.

This sentence refers to a building; that’s why you will use tall. And its antonym is short.

Tall is also used to talk about people’s height, as in:

Sally is tall for her age.A Sally é alta para a idade dela.

They’re strong-willed, independent, and brave. On the other hand, they can also be seen as arrogant, intolerant, and very demanding.

Elas são obstinadas, independentes e corajosas. Por outro lado, também podem ser vistas como arrogantes, intolerantes e muito exigentes.



These two sentences make contrasting descriptions. The first sentence presents the strengths, and the second, the weaknesses.

They are connected by on the other hand, which is used to introduce something that contrasts with what was just mentioned. Another way of doing this is using but then again.

Now, to add information, we have the word and, which is used to link two elements that complement each other. Also is used with the sense of adding information to what was already said. You could use as well to convey the same idea, but as well will be used at the end of the sentence. Like this:

They’re strong-willed, independent, and brave. On the other hand, they can be seen as arrogant, intolerant, and very demanding as well.

Elas são obstinadas, independentes e corajosas. Por outro lado, podem ser vistas como arrogantes, intolerantes e muito exigentes também.

Still is one more word used to link contrasting elements. Despite that means the same thing and could replace it in this sentence. Another word that could be used is nevertheless.

The third profile is the steadiness type. Take a look:

They’re people who like to collaborate, and they work well in a team; they’re loyal, patient, reliable, and diplomatic. However, in some

situations, they may seem to be indifferent, unmotivated, and indecisive.São pessoas que gostam de colaborar e trabalham bem em equipe;

são leais, pacientes, confiáveis e diplomáticas. Entretanto, em algumas situações, podem parecer indiferentes, desmotivadas e indecisas.

The second profile presented was the influence type, which also has its strengths and weaknesses:

They have an optimistic and positive outlook on life. Still, they can be undisciplined, disorganized, and even insecure.

Elas têm uma visão otimista e positiva da vida. Apesar disso, podem ser indisciplinadas, desorganizadas e até mesmo inseguras.



The f irst and is used to connect complementary elements. In this case, besides that or moreover could also be used to add one more idea, one more concept, expressed in the sentence they work well in a team.

The second and in the sentence does not add another idea, just another element to the list of adjectives. It is the same for the third one. So, in these cases, it would not be possible to use moreover or besides that.

However introduces something that contrasts with what was previously said. But or yet could also be used to replace it.

Here are the different connectors that link contrasting ideas that we have seen so far:

on the other handpor outro lado

CONNECTORS – OPPOSING/CONTRASTING IDEAS

but then againno entanto / porém / entretanto

And these are the connectors for similar ideas that we have seen so far:

still apesar disso

despite thatapesar disso

neverthelesstodavia

however/yet no entanto

but mas

ande

CONNECTORS – SIMILAR IDEAS

besides that / moreover além disso

alsotambém

as welltambém

Now you know several adjectives and how they are formed. You have also learned some antonyms and how they can be formed based on prefixes. You

have also seen how to link contrasting and similar ideas in speech.



45

Activity A – Answers1. strong-willed2. brave3. demanding4. diplomatic 5. vital6. low / short

7. high / tall8. reliable9. decisive 10. wrong11. right12. loyal

Activity B – Answers1. high2. optimistic and positive3. Still / Despite that4. On the other hand / But then again5. loyal, patient, reliable6. However / But / Yet



( 1 ) obstinado

( 2 ) corajoso

( 3 ) exigente

( 4 ) diplomático

( 5 ) crucial

( 6 ) baixo

( 7 ) alto

( 8 ) confiável

( 9 ) decidido

( 10 ) errado

( 11 ) certo

( 12 ) leal

( ) diplomatic

( ) low/short

( ) reliable

( ) wrong

( ) brave

( ) loyal

( ) decisive

( ) vital

( ) right

( ) strong-willed

( ) high/tall

( ) demanding

1. The thief didn’t enter the house because the wall is . O ladrão não entrou na casa porque o muro é alto.

2. They have an outlook on life. Elas têm uma visão otimista e positiva da vida.

3. , they can be undisciplined, disorganized, and even insecure. Apesar disso, podem ser indisciplinadas, desorganizadas, e até mesmo inseguras.

4. , they can also be seen as arrogant, intolerant, and very demanding. Por outro lado, elas também podem ser vistas como arrogantes, intolerantes e muito exigentes.

5. They’re people who like to collaborate, and they work well in a team; they’re , , , and diplomatic.

São pessoas que gostam de colaborar, e trabalham bem em equipe; são leais, pacientes, confiáveis e diplomáticas.

6. , in some situations, they may seem to be indifferent, unmotivated, and indecisive. Entretanto, em algumas situações, podem parecer ser indiferentes, desmotivados e indecisos.


Part 3.

Activities


46

In the f irst part of this chapter, you saw that suffixes, such as -ing, are used in the formation of adjectives. However, suffixes are also used with verbs. When we add -ing to a verb, we can say it is in the -ing form.

Since -ing is a suffix, sometimes the spelling of the verbs changes. The general spelling rule is to simply add -ing to the end of the verb’s base form. For example:

to keepmanter

to readler

to spendgastar

keeping

reading

spending

SPELLING RULES – VERBS IN THE -ING FORM

In the case of verbs that end in -e, we lose the -e and add -ing to the end. For example:

to makefazer

making


As for verbs ending in a consonant, vowel, and consonant, or CVC, when this syllable is stressed, we double the last consonant. Observe:

to runcorrer

running



Part 4.


47

The -ing form can be used when a verb is the subject of a sentence or part of it. For example:

But, if the verb ends in CVC but the f inal consonant is -W, -X, or -Y, the last consonant is not doubled. Take a look:

to enjoycurtir/aproveitar

enjoying


Knowing the personality profiles is vital in people management. Saber os tipos de perf is comportamentais é vital no gerenciamento de pessoas.

INFINITIVE OR -ING FORM

Knowing is right at the beginning, and it is part of the subject of this sentence. When a verb is used as the subject or part of it, it can come up like this, in the -ing form. The main verb is is, the verb to be conjugated in the simple present.

It is also possible to use the infinitive as the subject or part of the subject of a sentence. Observe:

To know the personality profiles is vital in people management. Saber os tipos de perf is comportamentais é vital no gerenciamento de pessoas.

INFINITIVE OR -ING FORM

The verb to know, which is still part of the subject, is in the infinitive.

Verbs are words that describe actions, states, and experiences. Verbs can be part of the sentence’s subject when the action is highlighted, and something is being said about it. In these cases, both the -ing form and the infinitive are correct. In English, the infinitive is formed by the particle to and the verb. For example: to know.



48

But besides this situation you have just seen, these two verb forms can be used as complements of other verbs. For example:

Here is a list of other verbs that can only be followed by another verb in the infinitive:

The boss manages to keep that person integrated into the team. O chefe consegue manter aquela pessoa integrada à equipe.

VERB + TO INFINITIVE

The main verb in the sentence is manages. The following verb, to keep, is in the infinitive, and functions as a verb complement.

However, depending on the main verb, the complement will be either in the infinitive or in the -ing form.

This is the case of the verb to manage: it only allows verb complements in the infinitive form. This also applies to the verb to want. Observe:

The “dominance” personality profile wants to achieve results.O perfil “dominante” quer alcançar resultados.

VERB + INFINITIVE

VERBS + INFINITIVE

to planplanejar

to decidedecidir

to chooseescolher

to have ter

to needprecisar

to wantquerer



49

The main verb determines whether the verb complement will be in the infinitive or not.

Other verbs will only be followed by verbs in the -ing form. Take a look:

The HR Department suggests considering the personality types to form teams at work.

O Departamento de RH sugere considerar os tipos de personalidade para formar equipes no trabalho.

VERB + VERB IN THE -ING FORM

To suggest is an example of a verb that will only have verb complements in the -ing form. In this case, the complement is the verb considering. The verb to enjoy also accepts only verb complements in the -ing form, such as working.

Other verbs follow this rule, such as:

The “steadiness” personality type enjoys working in a team.O perfil “estável” curte trabalhar em equipe.

VERB + VERB IN THE -ING FORM

to admitadmitir

to avoidevitar

to considerconsiderar

to enjoycurtir/aproveitar

to riskarriscar

to keepmanter

Some verbs accept the verb complement both in the infinitive and in the -ing form. In these cases, you can use either form. One of them is the verb to like. For instance, you can either say:

The “conscientiousness” profile likes to execute tasks the right way.The “conscientiousness” profile likes executing tasks the right way.

O “perf il conforme” gosta de fazer as tarefas do jeito certo.

VERB + TO INFINITIVE / -ING FORM



The verb complement that follows to like can either be in the infinitive, such as to execute, or in the -ing form, like executing. Both sentences are correct and have the same meaning.

Other verbs that accept both forms are:

All the staff trained for three months.Toda a equipe treinou por três meses.

USES OF -ED SIMPLE PAST – REGULAR VERBS

VERB + TO INFINITIVE / -ING FORM

to loveamar/gostar

to prefer preferir

to hate odiar

Another suff ix that can be used in the formation of adjectives is -ed, as in organized and motivated.

But this suffix may also be used with verbs. For example, it is used to form the conjugation of regular verbs in the simple past. For instance:

Lucy’s hard work paid off. She was finally promoted. O trabalho duro da Lucy valeu a pena. Ela foi f inalmente promovida.

USES OF -ED PAST PARTICIPLE – REGULAR VERBS

Trained is the conjugation of the regular verb to train in the simple past. Because it is a regular verb, it has the suff ix -ed.

The suff ix -ed can also be used to form the past participle of regular verbs:

In this sentence, promoted comes from the verb to promote. The suff ix -ed doesn’t form the simple past. In this case, this is the past participle of the verb.



The past participle is used with the verb to be to form the passive voice. Note the example:

Lucy was promoted by Jack.A Lucy foi promovida pelo Jack.

PASSIVE VOICE – REGULAR VERBS

The auxiliary verb of this sentence is was, the verb to be conjugated in the simple past. Promoted is the past participle of the verb to promote, and it is the main verb. The rest of the sentence indicates who performed the action: by Jack. This is called the agent of the passive.

Lucy is in a passive position in the sentence. And the person who executed the promotion is not emphasized anymore, going to the end of the sentence. That happens because this sentence is in the passive voice.

If this sentence were in the active voice, it would be like this:

Jack promoted Lucy.O Jack promoveu a Lucy.

ACTIVE VOICE – REGULAR VERBS

In this sentence, promoted is the verb to promote in the simple past. Note we added the suff ix -ed to it, since it is a regular verb. Jack is the subject of the sentence, and Lucy is the object. Jack, the one who performed the action, is emphasized right at the beginning of the sentence.

There are two ways of saying things: you can use the active voice or the passive voice.

In the active voice, the emphasis is on the doer of the action. In the passive voice, the emphasis is on the one that receives the action.

Take a look at another sentence in the active voice:

The HR Department hires the employees.O Departamento de RH contrata os funcionários.




The focus is on the doer, the HR Department, which is the subject. The action is described by the verb hires, which is in the simple present. The employees is the object of the sentence, the one that receives the action. This sentence is in the active voice.

In the passive voice, the emphasis is on who receives the action. Take a look:

The employees is no longer the object of the sentence and became the subject, right at the beginning of the sentence. After the subject, we have the verb to be in the same verb form as the sentence in the active voice, which is the simple present. The verb to be agrees with the subject: the employees are. Right after the verb to be comes the past participle of the main verb in the active voice, to hire. Considering it is a regular verb, hired is the past participle.

By the HR Department is called the agent of the passive. It indicates who performed the action. It is always introduced by the preposition by. The agent of the passive is optional information, given the fact that the passive voice’s emphasis is on who receives the action, and not on who performed it.

So, one of the uses of the past participle is to form sentences in the passive voice. In general terms, the passive voice is used when we wish to emphasize the action itself. It is formed by the verb to be conjugated according to the subject, followed by the past participle of the verb indicating the action of the sentence. Here is one more example:

The employees are hired by the HR Department.Os funcionários são contratados pelo Departamento de RH.


A company is composed of several different people.Uma empresa é composta por várias pessoas diferentes.


The subject of this sentence is a company, third person singular. The verb to be is conjugated in the simple present, according to the subject. Right after that, there is the past participle of the verb to compose, formed by adding the suff ix -ed, because it is a regular verb. Note that we use the preposition of to indicate what the company is composed of. It is the complement of the verb.



Observe other examples:

In the f irst example, the subject is people management, third person singular, and the verb to be is conjugated in the simple present as is. Following it is the past participle characterized. Again, the suff ix -ed is being used here because the verb to characterize is regular.

In the second sentence, the subject is fifty people, which is plural. So, the verb to be is conjugated in the plural: are. Then, it is followed by a past participle: employed, with the suff ix -ed because the verb is regular. The agent of the passive appears at the end of the sentence, and it is introduced by the preposition by.

All these examples of passive voice were in the simple present. But the passive voice can also be formed in the simple past.

First, observe a sentence in the active voice and in the simple past:

People management is characterized as a set of dynamic and interactive processes.

O gerenciamento de pessoas é caracterizado como um conjunto de processos interativos e dinâmicos.


Fifty people are employed by the company.Cinquenta pessoas são empregadas pela empresa.

The company fired twenty employees.A empresa demitiu vinte funcionários.


This sentence is in the active voice. That means the emphasis is on who performs the action: the company, which is the subject. The main verb, fired, is a regular verb conjugated in the simple past. The object, the one who receives the action, is twenty employees.

Observe the same sentence in the passive voice:

Twenty employees were fired by the company.Vinte funcionários foram demitidos pela empresa.




Twenty employees is now the subject; yet, it still receives the action, working as a passive subject. The one that performs the action is still the company, and it comes at the end of the sentence with the use of the preposition by.

The positions of the subject and the object were switched. The meaning of the sentence was preserved, but its emphasis changed. In the active voice, the emphasis was on the company, the one that performs the action, and, in the passive voice, it is on twenty employees, the one that receives the action.

In the sentence in the passive voice, were is conjugated in the simple past, according to the subject, which is plural. The verb fired is no longer conjugated in the simple past; it is a past participle. As to fire is a regular verb, both verb forms are composed by adding the suff ix -ed.

In the case of irregular verbs, there is no general rule regarding the formation of the past participle. Some past participles are going to be the same or almost the same as the verb in its base form. Others may look just the same as their conjugation in the simple past. However, there are still some which will be quite different. Have a look at some examples:

INFINITIVE

to beser/estar

to putcolocar

to makefazer

to knowconhecer

to loseperder

to takepegar

PAST PARTICIPLE

been

put

made

known

lost

taken

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS

The sentences in the passive voice with irregular verbs will maintain the same structure seen so far, with an inversion of the subject and the object, and with the verb to be followed by a past participle. The difference is that the past participle will not end in -ed. For example:



The subject of the sentence is the behavioral theory, third person singular; therefore, to be is conjugated as is, in the simple present. Known is the past participle of the irregular verb to know. In this case, by does not indicate the agent of the passive, because the acronym DiSC does not refer to who does the action. The preposition by is part of the expression to be known by, which indicates the name of this theory.

Check out more examples with irregular verbs, now in the simple past:

HR was known as the “Personnel Department” in the past. O RH era conhecido como o “Departamento de Pessoal” no passado.

PASSIVE VOICE – IRREGULAR VERBS

Employees are put closer to their full potential by people management strategies.Colaboradores são colocados mais próximos do seu potencial por estratégias de

gerenciamento de pessoas.


Employees is the passive subject, followed by the verb to be, conjugated accordingly in the simple present as are, and put, the past participle of the irregular verb to put. In this case, there is the agent of the passive, people management strategies. It is introduced by the preposition by.

Look at one more example:

The behavioral theory is known by the acronym DiSC.A teoria comportamental é conhecida pela sigla DiSC.


All the investment in that professional was lost.Todo o investimento naquele profissional foi perdido.



In the f irst sentence, the subject is HR, third person singular, so to be is conjugated as was, in the simple past. The main verb in the past participle is known.

In the second sentence, the subject is all the investment in that professional, third person singular. In this sentence, the verb to be is conjugated in the simple past as was. And lost is the past participle of the irregular verb to lose.

In this chapter, you’ve learned to use the infinitive and the -ing form as verb complements, as well as some

spelling rules involving the suffix -ing. You have also seen some examples of regular and irregular verbs in the past participle, as well as the formation of the passive voice. If

you want to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Infinitive Form Page 213Irregular Verbs: Past Participle Page 221Passive Voice Page 239Spelling Rules: -ING Form Page 291Verbs + Infinitive or -ING Form Page 305




Part 5.

Activities

Infinitive

to be

to put

to fire

to make

to know

to lose

to take

to employ

Simple Past

was/were

put

fired

made

knew

lost

took

employed

Past Participle

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

A. Complete the table with the past participle form of the verbs.

B. Fill in the blanks with the missing words according to the translation.

1. All the investment in that professional .

Todo o investimento naquele profissional foi perdido.

2. The behavioral theory by the acronym DiSC.

A teoria comportamental é conhecida pela sigla DiSC.

3. HR as the “Personnel Department” in the past.

O RH era conhecido como o “Departamento de Pessoal” no passado.

4. Twenty employees by the company.

Vinte funcionários foram demitidos pela empresa.


1. was lost2. is known3. was known4. were fired5. is composed of6. was promoted

1. been2. put3. fired4. made

5. known6. lost7. taken8. employed


5. A company several different people.

Uma empresa é composta por várias pessoas diferentes.

6. Lucy by Jack.

A Lucy foi promovida pelo Jack.


Words of AffirmationWords of Affirmation

3

Chapter 3



We have already seen how getting to know a little bit more about people’s personality helps the HR department to hire and to allocate a suitable position to each person in the company. When we perform tasks that suit our professional profile well, job satisfaction increases. But a work environment is not made solely by satisfaction. Employees need to feel motivated and, above all, valued.

Gary Chapman is the author of the book Five Languages of Appreciation in the Workplace. In this book, he presents us with some practices that can be very eff icient in managing a team and motivating people. This theory goes very well with the DiSC theory we have already covered, especially when it comes to communication.

Have you ever noticed how much difference a positive word can make in someone’s day? This is the first language of appreciation we are going to learn. It is known as the language of “Words of Affirmation.” People who prefer this type of language feel more valued when they receive an honest compliment on their tasks. After all, who doesn’t like a compliment?

In addition to having a positive impact on the person who receives the compliment, the words of aff irmation help reinforce behaviors that are good for both the company and the work environment. For example, complimenting an employee on a job well done is a great way to stimulate them to continue to do their job increasingly better. Words of aff irmation can also be very eff icient in training and professional qualif ication processes, always reinforcing the trainees’ merit.

But beware. Before using the f ive languages of appreciation, it’s necessary to observe the DiSC personality profiles. As a reminder, those profiles are:

WORDS OF AFFIRMATION

In this chapter, you will learn how to use prepositions, phrasal verbs, idiomatic expressions, and verb patterns. You will also see some important vocabulary and grammar topics to make it happen.

Now, look at the script of Words of Affirmation.

Part 1.


61

- Dominance- Influence- Steadiness- Conscientiousness

An employee whose DiSC personality type is “conscientiousness” tends to be reserved and maybe prefers to receive the words of aff irmation in a more DiSCreet way. Public praise may make this employee feel uncomfortable, taking away some of the strength of the words of aff irmation. On the other hand, an employee whose DiSC personality type is “inf luence” will love to be complimented in public.

The job market is migrating to an increasingly diverse scenario, bringing together people of very different personalities to work toward a common goal. Just by identifying the personality profiles of the DiSC theory, we can have a huge gain in communication. If we use the languages of appreciation, then that potential is even bigger. And when you use a word of aff irmation with someone, remember to always be honest. Besides not being cool to force a compliment just to try to please others, this can also lead to misunderstandings.

More than ever, it’s necessary to turn the workplace into a healthy and stimulating environment. This is one of the biggest challenges in people management.

PALAVRAS DE AFIRMAÇÃO

Já vimos como conhecer um pouco mais sobre a personalidade das pessoas ajuda o departamento de RH a contratar e alocar uma posição adequada para cada pessoa na empresa. Quando desempenhamos tarefas mais adequadas ao nosso perf il profissional, a satisfação com o trabalho aumenta. Mas nem só de satisfação se faz um ambiente de trabalho. Os colaboradores precisam se sentir motivados, e principalmente, valorizados. Gary Chapman é o autor do livro As Cinco Linguagens da Valorização Pessoal no Ambiente de Trabalho. Nessa obra, ele nos apresenta algumas práticas que podem ser muito eficientes para gerir uma equipe e motivar as pessoas. Essa teoria combina muito bem com a teoria DiSC que nós já abordamos, especialmente quando falamos de comunicação.



62

Já reparou como uma palavra positiva pode fazer a diferença no dia de uma pessoa? Esta é a primeira linguagem da valorização pessoal que vamos aprender. Ela é conhecida como a linguagem das “palavras de afirmação”. Pessoas que preferem esse tipo de linguagem se sentem mais valorizadas quando recebem um elogio sincero às suas atividades. Afinal, quem não gosta de um elogio?

Além de ter um impacto positivo na pessoa que recebe o elogio, as palavras de afirmação ajudam a reforçar comportamentos que são bons para a empresa e para o ambiente de trabalho. Por exemplo, elogiar um bom trabalho feito por um colaborador é uma ótima maneira de estimulá-lo a continuar realizando seu serviço cada vez melhor. As palavras de afirmação podem ser muito eficazes também em processos de treinamento e capacitação, sempre reforçando os acertos dos trainees.

Mas atenção: antes de sair usando as cinco linguagens da valorização pessoal, é preciso observar também os perf is de personalidade da teoria DiSC. Recordando, os perf is são:

- Dominante- Influente- Estável- Conforme

Um colaborador do perf il “conforme” é mais DiSCreto e talvez prefira receber as palavras afirmativas de modo mais reservado. Elogios em público podem fazer esse colaborador se sentir desconfortável, tirando a força das palavras de afirmação. Já um colaborador do perf il “inf luente” vai adorar receber elogios em público.

O mercado de trabalho está migrando para um cenário cada vez mais diverso, reunindo pessoas de personalidades bem diferentes para trabalhar em prol de um objetivo em comum. Apenas identif icando os perf is de personalidade da teoria DiSC, já podemos ter um ganho enorme na comunicação. Se usarmos as linguagens da valorização pessoal, esse potencial é ainda maior. E quando for usar uma palavra de afirmação com alguém, lembre-se de ser sempre sincero. Além de não ser legal forçar um elogio apenas para tentar agradar os outros, isso ainda pode levar a mal-entendidos.

Mais do que nunca, é preciso tornar o ambiente de trabalho um lugar saudável e estimulante. Esse é um dos maiores desafios na gestão de pessoas.



63

HR has evolved from finances to people management. And in order to do that, it uses the theory of f ive languages of appreciation, which walks alongside the DiSC theory.

Observe:

The theory of the Five Languages of Appreciation in the Workplace goes with the DiSC theory we have already covered.

A teoria das Cinco Linguagens da Valorização no Ambiente de Trabalho combina com a teoria DiSC que nós já abordamos.

Mary goes with Paul to the meeting.A Mary vai com o Paul para a reunião.

In this context, goes with suggests that two elements suit each other. In other words, one theory can be combined with another with the intention of better getting to know the team. To go with is a phrasal verb, so its sense is not to be taken literally.

A phrasal verb is an expression formed from a verb and a particle, such as a preposition or an adverb. This combination forms an expression with a specific idea. If the verb and the particle are separated, their meanings are different.

However, not every verb followed by a particle is a phrasal verb. To go with is an example of that. Individually, to go is a verb that means moving from one place to another, and individually with is a preposition that means accompanied by.

Take a look:

In the previous sentence, the verb and the particle have their separate meanings. Goes conveys the idea of physical movement from one place to another, and with conveys the idea of company. So that means that here, goes with is not a phrasal verb, because each word works separately.


Part 2.


64

Mary does not go alone to the meeting, the preposition with indicates her companion: Paul. So, go is just a verb, and with is just a preposition in this case.

Observe another example of a verb and a preposition together:

In the previous example, the verb to be, conjugated as are, expresses a location. The preposition in comes after the verb, and it refers to the place where Mary and Paul are. In this case, in is a preposition of place that means they are inside the meeting room.

Again, the verb and the preposition each have their separate meanings. Are is just the verb to be, and in is just a preposition of place here.

Observe another example:

They can even be separated from each other in the sentence:

Mary goes to the meeting with Paul. A Mary vai à reunião com o Paul.

Mary and Paul can go up the stairs.A Mary e o Paul podem subir as escadas.

The verb to go is followed by up. Up indicates where Mary and Paul go to, which is up the stairs, that is, towards the top. In this case, to go up is not a phrasal verb. To go means to move from one place to the other, followed by a direction, expressed here by up. Both to go and up keep their individual meanings.

Observe another example in which the verb and the preposition must be understood separately:

Mary and Paul are in the meeting room.A Mary e o Paul estão na sala de reunião.

Mary and Paul are from the HR Department.A Mary e o Paul são do Departamento de RH.



65

In the previous example, the verb to be is being used to talk about the origin of the subject, which is Mary and Paul. That’s why the preposition from is used. In this case, the origin is in the sense of where they work, which is the HR Department. In this case, the verb to be, conjugated as are, and the preposition from do not form a phrasal verb.

Prepositions such as up and in can indicate location, and from can be used to indicate origin. The preposition with can be used to indicate company. In these cases, they have a meaning on their own.

But prepositions can also be used to form phrasal verbs, which are very frequent in the English language. For instance:

The phrasal verb to take someone out means to invite someone to go out with you to a specif ic place, as your guest, for a specif ic activity, such as to have dinner, to watch a movie etc.

Phrasal verbs can be formed with other verbs, such as to come. By itself, this verb means to move towards the speaker or to arrive at the place where the speaker is. But when it is used in phrasal verbs, there will be considerable changes in meaning.

Observe:

On her payday, Lucy took her parents out for dinner.No dia do seu pagamento, a Lucy levou os seus pais para jantar.

Come on, we’re late!Vamos, estamos atrasados!

Come on is used to hurry someone. This phrasal verb is composed of the verb to come and the particle on, and it has nothing to do with moving toward a specif ic location.

There are other phrasal verbs formed with the verb to come, such as:

PHRASAL VERBS – VERB TO COME

to come downdiminuir

to come up withter / elaborar ideias

to come off (as)parecer



66

Observe these phrasal verbs in sentences:

In the f irst sentence, the phrasal verb to come down means to reduce in intensity, to become lower. As you can see, phrasal verbs are not to be taken by the literal meaning of their particles considered separately.

In the second sentence, the phrasal verb to come up with means to have, to conceive an idea.

In the third sentence, the phrasal verb to come off is formed with the particle off. On its own, off has several meanings, one of them being out of service. But together with the verb to come, it forms the expression to come off, which, when followed by as, means to give the impression of something.

Phrasal verbs will vary in meaning depending on the context. For example, to take out can be used both in the context of inviting and accompanying someone to a special event or of removing something from a place as in “to take out the trash”.

It all comes down to context. This applies to languages in general. Observe this example with to be over, which, according to the context, can be a phrasal verb or not:

The team’s productivity rates came down this semester.As taxas de produtividade da equipe diminuíram neste semestre.

Sally always comes up with interesting ideas during our meetings.A Sally sempre tem ideias interessantes durante nossas reuniões.

People with a “Dominant” personality profile can come off as arrogant.Pessoas com um perfil comportamental “Dominante” podem parecer arrogantes.

The plane is over the ocean.O avião está sobre o oceano.

In the previous sentence, is over is actually the verb to be conjugated in the simple present, followed by the preposition over. In this context, it refers to a geographical location, and the preposition indicates a place, which is over or above the ocean.



But, by changing the context, the meaning of to be over changes. Observe:

In the previous sentence, is with means being in the company of someone. The verb to be keeps its original meaning and so does the preposition with.

In a different context, the meaning will change. Observe:

Mary lost her job a few weeks ago, but she is over it now. A Mary perdeu o emprego dela há algumas semanas, mas ela já superou isso.

In this case, is over does not refer to a location. To be over something means to overcome a diff icult situation, which is to no longer feel the negative effects of something bad. Although the verb is conjugated in the simple present, note that Mary no longer feels bad about losing her job.

Let’s compare two more examples with the verb to be. Observe the sentence:

Mary is with Paul in the meeting room.A Mary está com o Paul na sala de reunião.

Mary is with Paul. She is his girlfriend.A Mary está com o Paul. Ela é a namorada dele.

In the sentence, is with indicates that Mary and Paul have a romantic relationship.

Observe how the context affects phrasal verbs formed with the verb to go:

The company went down.A empresa faliu.

In this sentence, went down is the simple past of to go down, and it carries the meaning of failing, losing value, or going bankrupt.

This phrasal verb is composed of the verb to go and the particle down. It does not carry the literal meaning of physically going down or south. Its meaning is not literal. It actually means to go bankrupt.



However, in another sentence, the same phrasal verb can have a different meaning. For instance:

Where were you when the crime went down?Onde você estava quando o crime ocorreu?

In this sentence, to go down is the same as to happen or to take place, due to the change of context. It is an informal phrasal verb.

There is yet another phrasal verb with to go: to go up. Observe it in a sentence:

The team’s productivity rates went up.As taxas de produtividade da equipe aumentaram.

Went is the verb to go conjugated in the simple past, and it is followed by the particle up, but in this example, it does not refer to the physical movement of going up. In this context, to go up means to increase.

But, in a different context, it can mean something else. Take a look:

At the end of Mary’s presentation, all the lights went up.No final da apresentação da Mary, todas as luzes se acenderam.

In this context, to go up means to turn on. It is still a phrasal verb, however, it means something entirely different.

Some verbs form several phrasal verbs and expressions, such as to go. This verb forms the phrasal verb to go out, which, according to the context, can mean to go somewhere to have fun or to date someone.

There are other phrasal verbs with the verb to go, such as to go on. Observe it in a sentence:

Sometimes meetings go on for hours.Às vezes, reuniões se estendem por horas.



To go on is a phrasal verb that can mean to continue.

However, in a different context, it can mean something different:

To go off can mean to explode. In this context, it is a f igure of speech, an explosion of anger. However, it can also refer to a literal explosion.

This phrasal verb can also be used in another context. For instance:

Paul interrupted Mary, but she went on speaking.Paul interrompeu Mary, mas ela continuou falando.

Went on is the phrasal verb to go on conjugated in the simple past. Here, it means to keep talking despite an interruption. Note that if to go on is followed by a verb, it will be in the -ing form.

Another phrasal verb with the verb to go is to go off. Observe this example:

Sally is so stressed out she went off on her assistant during the meeting.A Sally está tão estressada que ela explodiu com sua assistente durante a

reunião.

Sally woke up when her alarm went off.Sally acordou quando o alarme dela disparou.

In the previous sentence, to go off means to trigger or activate something; in this case, the sound of an alarm.

All the previous examples are of phrasal verbs formed with a verb followed by a preposition.

However, verbs followed by prepositions will not always form a phrasal verb. There are cases of prepositions following verbs according to the verb pattern.

For instance, note the example with the verb to wait and the preposition for:

Mary and Paul always wait for the bus together.A Mary e o Paul sempre esperam pelo ônibus juntos.



The bus is the complement of the verb to wait in this case. The preposition for connects the verb to wait to its complement.

Look at another example:

Mary and Paul go to the office at 8 o’clock.A Mary e o Paul vão para o escritório às 8 horas.

The verb to go is followed by the preposition to, which points the direction where Mary and Paul are going, which is the off ice.

To go to is not a phrasal verb, but a verb followed by a preposition that connects this verb to its complement. It is the verb pattern to be followed in this case.

Other verbs must be followed by a preposition to be connected to their complement, like the verb to leave. Observe:

Mary and Paul leave for the office at 8 o’clock.A Mary e o Paul saem / partem para o escritório às 8 horas.

To leave is followed by the preposition for. In this case, for also conveys the idea of direction.

There is a second preposition in this sentence: at. It is used to indicate time. At is an example of what we call prepositions of time.

To verb to listen also needs a preposition to be linked to its complement:

Mary listens to music while she works.A Mary escuta música enquanto trabalha.

The verb listens is followed by the preposition to, which connects it with its complement. In this case, music.

Now you know how to use some phrasal verbs, idiomatic expressions, and verb patterns.






( 1 ) ouvir

( 2 ) ir para

( 3 ) levar (alguém) para sair

( 4 ) diminuir

( 5 ) aumentar / acender

( 6 ) falir / perder valor

( 7 ) namorar / estar em um relacionamento

( 8 ) ter / elaborar uma ideia

( 9 ) prosseguir / continuar

( 10 ) explodir

( 11 ) superar

( 12 ) parecer

( ) to come down

( ) to come up with an idea

( ) to come off (as)

( ) to go down

( ) to go on

( ) to listen

( ) to be over (something)

( ) to take (someone) out

( ) to go off

( ) to go up

( ) to be with

( ) to go to

1. Mary and Paul the office at 8 o’clock. A Mary e o Paul partem para o escritório às 8 horas.

2. The plane the ocean. O avião está sobre o oceano.

3. Mary music while she works. A Mary escuta música enquanto trabalha.

4. Mary and Paul the HR Department. A Mary e o Paul são do Departamento de RH.

Part 3.

Activities


Activity A – Answers1. to listen2. to go to3. to take (someone) out4. to come down 5. to go up6. to go down

7. to be with8. to come up with an idea9. to go on10. to go off11. to be over (something) 12. to come off (as)

Activity B – Answers1. leave for2. is over3. listens to 4. are from 5. wait for6. go to

5. Mary and Paul always the bus together. A Mary e o Paul sempre esperam pelo ônibus juntos.

6. Mary and Paul the office at 8 o’clock. A Mary e o Paul vão para o escritório às 8 horas.




There are different uses of prepositions and verbs. Phrasal verbs and some idiomatic expressions are formed from a verb and a particle, which can be a preposition or an adverb. An example of this is the phrasal verb to go with.

A verb followed by a particle will not necessarily form a phrasal verb. In this case, the verb and the preposition keep their own separate meanings. For example, to go with in other contexts can literally mean to move somewhere with someone.

Some verbs will always be followed by specif ic prepositions, which are called dependent prepositions.

Prepositions are words that establish a connection between elements in a sentence.

Some very commonly used prepositions are:

PREPOSITIONS

to pode indicar a direção de um movimento para

for pode indicar direção, mas também o destinatário de uma ação para/por

at pode indicar o local ou o momento exato em que algo acontece em/para/a

on usado para se referir a local, momento ou assunto em/sobre/acima

of pode indicar posse de

from indica origem de

with indica uma relação entre dois ou mais elementos com

Part 4.


74

Some verbs need to be followed by prepositions in order to be connected to a complement. Verbs that need a preposition are called prepositional verbs. They are responsible for defining which preposition must be used in a given situation. That’s why they are called dependent prepositions: their use depends on the verb pattern.

Most of the time, dependent prepositions will not keep their individual senses. That is because their meanings depend on the pattern imposed by the verb they follow.

Observe these examples:

The verb is to go. Its complement is the office. When the verb to go has a complement, it needs a preposition to connect it to this complement. When using the verb to go indicating a direction, the correct preposition is to.

For is another preposition that indicates direction, but then a different verb will be used with it. Observe:

Mary and Paul go to the office at 8 o’clock. A Mary e o Paul vão para o escritório às 8 horas.

Mary and Paul go for the office at 8 o’clock.

DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONS

Mary and Paul leave for the office at 8 o’clock.A Mary e o Paul saem / partem para o escritório às 8 horas.


The preposition for is in accordance with the verb pattern of the verb to leave. To leave for a specif ic place conveys the idea of moving out of a place in a certain direction.



75

Prepositions that are dependent will be determined by the verbs, as seen in the previous examples.

For instance:

In this case, on is a dependent preposition that follows the pattern of the verb to compliment. There are two complements to this verb; the f irst one comes right after the verb without any preposition, because you compliment someone. However, you compliment someone on something. So, the preposition on connects the verb to its second complement: a job well done.

Prepositions are usually placed at the end of questions. Observe:

To force a compliment just to please others leads to misunderstandings.Forçar um elogio apenas para agradar os outros leva a mal-entendidos.


Where do Mary and Paul go to?Aonde a Mary e o Paul vão?

QUESTION WORD WHERE

The verb to lead, in this context, means to cause something. When used in this sense, it is followed by the dependent preposition to, which links the verb to its complement, misunderstandings.

To force and to please are in the infinitive form; so, in this case, the particle to precedes the verb, and it is not a preposition.

Notice the use of another dependent preposition in this example:

Complimenting an employee on a job well done is a great way to stimulate them.Elogiar um funcionário por um trabalho bem feito é uma ótima maneira de estimulá-lo.




76

The question starts with where, which is a question word used to ask questions about location. The sentence is in the interrogative form of the simple present. The auxiliary do is followed by the subject, Mary and Paul. Then, the main verb to go in the base form and, at the end, the preposition to.

In this sentence, the preposition to indicates a destination, the place where Mary and Paul are going. As the verb to go itself already indicates direction, it is possible to form a sentence without the preposition to. Observe:

The preposition to can be omitted, because it is implicit in the context.

Now, some questions cannot be asked without the dependent preposition. Observe the next example:

Where do Mary and Paul come from?De onde a Mary e o Paul vêm?

QUESTION WORD WHERE

Where do Mary and Paul go?Aonde Mary e Paul vão?

The verb to come conveys the idea of moving towards the direction of the speaker. The preposition from indicates origin. Without it, the idea of the sentence remains incomplete, so from will be placed at the end of the question. Some dictionaries even consider to come from a phrasal verb, which means the preposition from would be part of the verb.

As where is used to ask questions about places, directions, and origin, it is common to use it with verbs that indicate movement. After this question word, the sentence will be in the interrogative form. Observe:

Where did the bomb go off?Onde a bomba explodiu?

QUESTION WORD WHERE + INTERROGATIVE FORM



This sentence also begins with the question word where. Note it is in the interrogative form of the simple past, which is composed of the auxiliary verb did, followed by the subject, the bomb, and, at the end of the sentence, the phrasal verb to go off. Off is part of the verb; it is neither a dependent nor an isolated preposition. The fact it is placed last in the sentence is due to the verb position in this structure. As to go off has no complement, it comes last.

There are other question words besides where, and each one of them is going to be used for a specif ic purpose. Where refers to place, direction, or location, as you already know.

Who is used to ask a question about a person. Check it out:

Who goes to the office with Paul?Quem vai para o escritório com o Paul?

Mary. Mary goes with Paul to the office.A Mary. A Mary vai com o Paul para o escritório.

QUESTION WORD WHO (SUBJECT)

The previous question is in the simple present. It starts with who, which is placed where the subject was supposed to be, followed by the main verb goes, conjugated in the third person singular. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

Since the question is about the subject of the sentence, who will be followed by an affirmative structure. Therefore, the auxiliary verb do is not in this question, and the main verb will be conjugated in the third person singular.

Note that in the answer, Mary, that is, a person, is the subject of the aff irmative sentence.

In the answer to the previous question, note that Paul is a person, but he is the object of the verb. Since Paul is a person, who is used to ask a question about him. But in this case, it is necessary to use the interrogative structure, so an auxiliary verb will be necessary. Check it out:

Who does Mary go to the office with?Com quem Mary vai para o escritório?

Paul. Mary goes with Paul to the office.Com o Paul. A Mary vai com o Paul para o escritório.

QUESTION WORD WHO (OBJECT)



In the question, who is followed by the auxiliary verb does, conjugated according to the subject – Mary –, which is in the third person singular. Then comes the main verb to go in its base form, and the complement of the sentence. In this case, since the question is not about the subject, but about the object of the sentence, the answer is Paul. Therefore, note that when we use who to ask about a person that functions as the object of the sentence, it will be followed by the interrogative structure of the verb form.

Observe that the preposition with is placed at the end of the sentence, which is very common in spoken English. It happens because the question is about the person with whom she goes to the off ice, so the preposition with indicates Mary’s company.

There is another preposition in this sentence, to, and its function is to connect the verb to go to its complement, the office, indicating the direction where they will go.

Who has yet another function. Observe the example:

Who comes at the beginning of the question. This word takes the place of the subject in the sentence. It is followed by the negative auxiliary verb of the simple present – doesn’t – and the main verb to like in its base form. The complement of the sentence is a compliment.

It seems like a question about the subject. But this sentence is not asking who literally doesn’t like receiving compliments. That is a rhetorical question, which in reality is the same as saying:

Who doesn’t like a compliment?Quem não gosta de um elogio?

QUESTION WORD WHO

Everybody likes a compliment.Todo mundo gosta de um elogio.

As you can see, who can be followed by the negative form to add emphasis to what is being said.

Whose is another question word. It is used to ask who owns something. For instance:



Whose conveys the idea of ownership. As you can see, it can be followed by a sentence in the aff irmative structure. The question is about who has the best personality profile. It is about ownership.

It would also be correct to say the following:

Whose personality profile is more suited for this position?De quem é o perf il de personalidade mais apropriado para essa posição?

QUESTION WORD – WHOSE

Whose is the personality profile more suited for this position?De quem é o perf il de personalidade mais apropriado para essa posição?

QUESTION WORD – WHOSE

In the previous sentence, whose is followed by an interrogative structure. Right after whose, we have the verb is followed by the personality profile, which is what is owned by someone in the sentence.

Although the pronunciation of whose and who’s are similar, the meaning is quite different. Look at the sentence:

Who’s better suited for this position?Quem é mais adequado para essa posição?

WHO

Who’s is a contraction of who is. In other words, it is the contraction of the verb to be conjugated in the simple present, with the question word who, which, in this case, takes the place of the subject of the sentence. Their pronunciation is very similar, but their meanings are different.

Who, where, and whose are question words, but they can also have another function. These words can be used to connect sentences and avoid repetition in speech. When used to that end, they are called relative pronouns.

For example:



In both sentences, the word people, the plural of person, is the subject. So, in this case, it is possible to merge these sentences into one and avoid repetition by using the relative pronoun who:

People who prefer this type of language like receiving a compliment.As pessoas que preferem esse tipo de linguagem gostam de receber um elogio.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS – WHO

The subject of the sentence is people, and it is the subject of two verbs: prefer and like. The relative pronoun who is being used to connect two sentences.

This sentence can be divided into two:

People prefer this type of language.As pessoas preferem esse tipo de linguagem.

People like receiving a compliment.As pessoas gostam de receber um elogio.


People who prefer this type of language like receiving a compliment.As pessoas que preferem esse tipo de linguagem gostam de receber um elogio.

People who like receiving a compliment prefer this type of language. As pessoas que gostam de receber um elogio preferem esse tipo de linguagem.


The relative pronoun goes right after the term it substitutes. In informal contexts, as in daily regular conversations, it would be possible to use that instead of who in the previous examples.

The previous sentences are examples of how to avoid the repetition of a word that functions as the subject and refers to a person.



Paul, whom Mary goes to the office with, is her friend.

When a person is the object, under more formal contexts, it is best to use whom. Let’s see that in parts:

The relative pronoun whom united the two sentences into just one and kept the same meaning. This sentence is quite formal, because the preposition is placed before the relative pronoun.

In neutral contexts, however, the sentence could be like this:

Mary goes to the office with Paul. Paul is her friend.A Mary vai para o escritório com o Paul. O Paul é amigo dela.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS – WHOM

In the f irst sentence, Mary is the subject and Paul is the object of the verb. In the second sentence, there is extra information about Paul: he is her friend. In the sentence that follows, Paul is the subject. As you can see, both sentences repeat the word Paul. It is possible to unite them by using whom, therefore avoiding the repetition in the sentence in which Paul is the object.

There is a formal way of doing so:

Paul, with whom Mary goes to the office, is her friend. Paul, com quem Mary vai ao escritório, é amigo dela.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS – WHOM FORMAL

RELATIVE PRONOUNS – WHOM NEUTRAL

The preposition is not before the relative pronoun, so it is considered neutral, not formal.

In informal contexts, such as daily conversations, whom is not commonly used. Who is more frequent. For instance:



Paul, who Mary goes to the office with, is her friend.Paul, com quem Mary vai ao escritório, é amigo dela.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS – WHO INFORMAL

Another word that can also function as a relative pronoun and unite two separate sentences is whose. As mentioned before, it is used to refer to ownership or possession. When it works as a relative pronoun, it connects sentences. For example:

An employee whose DiSC personality type is “conscientiousness” tends to be reserved.Um funcionário cujo perfil DiSC é “conforme” tende a ser mais reservado.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSE

Whose refers to the one that has a given personality type, indicating ownership. As the relative pronoun comes right after the term to which it refers, it indicates that the person who has this profile is the employee.

Where can also be a relative pronoun. Observe:

Mary and Paul are at the office where they have meetings.Mary e Paul estão no escritório onde eles fazem reuniões.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHERE

Where is the relative pronoun, used to avoid the repetition of the office, which is a location.



In this chapter, you’ve learned a little more about dependent prepositions, and after that you saw the question words: where, who, and whose. Then, you

learned how to use them as relative pronouns. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the

Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Dependent Prepositions Page 205Question Word Where Page 252Question Word Who Page 257Question Word Whose Page 261Relative Pronouns Page 263




Part 5.

Activities

1. is the personality type more suited for this position? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

2. better suited for this position? ( ) Who’s ( ) Where ( ) Whose

3. did the bomb go off? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

4. does Mary go to the office with? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

5. do Mary and Paul go to? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

6. doesn’t like a compliment? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

7. goes to the office with Paul? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

8. personality profile is better suited for this position? ( ) Who ( ) Where ( ) Whose

A. Choose the best option to complete the sentences.


1. Paul, Mary goes to the office, is her friend.

Paul, com quem Mary vai ao escritório, é amigo dela. (FORMAL)

2. Paul, Mary goes to the office with, is her friend.

Paul, com quem Mary vai ao escritório, é amigo dela. (NEUTRAL)

3. Paul, Mary goes to the office with, is her friend.

Paul, com quem Mary vai ao escritório, é amigo dela. (INFORMAL)

4. Mary and Paul are at the office the fight went down.

Mary e Paul estão no escritório onde a briga aconteceu.


1. with whom2. whom3. who4. where5. who / that 6. whose

1. Whose 2. Who’s 3. Where 4. Who

5. Where 6. Who 7. Who 8. Whose


5. People prefer this type of language like receiving a compliment.

As pessoas que preferem esse tipo de linguagem gostam de receber um elogio.

6. An employee DiSC personality type is “conscientiousness” tends to be reserved.

Um funcionário cujo perf il DiSC é “conforme” tende a ser mais reservado.


Quality TimeQuality Time

4

Chapter 4



“Words have power.”

You have already heard this expression before, haven’t you? That’s why words of aff irmation are so important in relationships, be them professional or personal. But we can’t build a positive relationship out of words only: actions are very important too. Today we’re going to learn the second language of appreciation:

Quality time.

You have probably gone through something like this before. You need to solve a problem and you decide to ask your boss for guidance. He is a person full of responsibilities, always on the phone, doing a thousand tasks. You go talk to him, but he is so busy that he barely listens. He gives you a random answer, and you leave his off ice with more questions than answers. You have already been through something like that, haven’t you? I’m sure you have.

The language of quality time is a demonstration that you are really interested in keeping a conversation. And it’s not enough just to seem interested. The languages of appreciation only work when they are applied with honesty.

Let’s rethink the previous situation. You go into your boss’s off ice with a question, and he asks you to sit down. You explain the problem for a while. He even ignores some calls. In the end, you leave his off ice with clear directions on what to do. That’s something else, isn’t it? It’s a completely different situation. Not only because you left his off ice with the answer you needed, but also because you had a real conversation.

QUALITY TIME

In this chapter, you will learn the periods of the day and days of the week. You will also see some verbs used to talk about the course of time and idiomatic expressions, besides other vocabulary words and grammar topics.

Now, look at the script of Quality Time.

Part 1.


88

The boss showed you that the time you spent in his off ice was actually dedicated to you, and not shared with a thousand other things.

Do you know where else this language can be useful?

In personal relationships!

Isn’t it annoying when you’re with somebody who won’t get off their phone? You tell stories of how your day went, while the person reads tweets and memes. You ask them a complex question, and the person answers “yes”, “no”, or even “uh-huh.” We can always tell when people are paying attention to us or not.

Quality time is precisely using these moments to show your partner or colleague that you are really paying attention to them. This makes them feel valued. Especially nowadays when we are all on our phones all the time. In the workplace, the importance of quality time goes beyond the relationship between the boss and the employees.

It makes a difference in the relationship between all team members. For example, when co-workers leave together for lunch or for happy hour… When someone makes small talk at the coffee station… Or when you offer to listen to a workmate who is going through a really hard situation… This is quality time put into practice.

In a hyperconnected world with a massive f low of information, dedicating some time to listen to others seems to be increasingly rare. That only makes quality time more important to us all. After all, no one likes to be ignored, right?

TEMPO DE QUALIDADE

“As palavras têm poder”.

Você já deve ter ouvido essa expressão antes. É por isso que as palavras de afirmação são tão importantes para os relacionamentos, sejam eles profissionais ou afetivos. Mas não só com palavras se constrói uma relação positiva: ações são muito importantes também. Hoje vamos conhecer a segunda linguagem da valorização pessoal.



89

Tempo de qualidade.

Você já deve ter passado por uma situação semelhante. Você precisa resolver um problema, aí decide pedir uma orientação para o seu chefe. Ele é uma pessoa cheia de responsabilidades, está sempre ao telefone e fazendo mil tarefas. Você vai falar com ele, mas ele está tão atarefado que praticamente nem ouve. Ele te dá uma resposta qualquer e você sai da sala dele com mais dúvidas do que certezas. Você já passou por algo assim, não é? Tenho certeza que já.

A linguagem do tempo de qualidade é uma demonstração de que você está realmente interessado em manter uma conversa. E não adianta só parecer que está interessado. As linguagens da valorização pessoal só funcionam bem quando são aplicadas com sinceridade.

Vamos repensar a situação anterior. Você entra na sala do seu chefe com uma dúvida, ele pede para você se sentar. Você explica o problema. Ele até deixa de atender algumas ligações. Finalmente, você sai da sala dele com uma orientação clara sobre o que fazer. É outra coisa, não é? Esta é uma situação completamente diferente da anterior. Não só porque você saiu da sala do chefe com a resposta que precisava, mas também porque vocês tiveram uma conversa de verdade. O chefe mostrou que o tempo que você passou no escritório dele foi realmente dedicado a você, e não dividido com mil outras coisas.

Sabe onde mais essa linguagem pode ser útil?

Nos relacionamentos afetivos!

Não é super chato quando você está com alguém e essa pessoa não sai do telefone? Você está contando como foi o seu dia e a pessoa está lendo tuítes e memes. Você faz uma pergunta complexa, e a pessoa responde sim, não, ou até “ã-hã”. A gente consegue perceber quando as pessoas estão nos dando atenção ou não.

E tempo de qualidade é justamente usar esses momentos para demonstrar ao parceiro ou colega de trabalho que você está realmente dando atenção a ele. Isso faz com que ele se sinta valorizado. Especialmente nos dias de hoje, em que nós vivemos no telefone o tempo todo. No ambiente de trabalho, a importância do tempo de qualidade vai além da relação entre o chefe e os funcionários.



Ele faz a diferença no relacionamento entre todos os membros da equipe. Por exemplo, quando os colegas do escritório saem todos juntos para um almoço ou um happy hour... Quando alguém puxa um papo no cantinho do café... Ou quando você se oferece para conversar com um colega que está passando por uma situação realmente dif ícil... Isso é o tempo de qualidade aplicado na prática.

Em um mundo hiperconectado e com um enorme f luxo de informações, dedicar algum tempo a ouvir o outro parece ser cada vez mais raro. Isso só faz com que o tempo de qualidade se torne ainda mais importante para todos nós. Afinal de contas, ninguém gosta de ser ignorado, não é?




There are different ways to measure time. There is the chronological time, for instance, in which time can be fractionated, such as into hours and days. The day can also be divided into periods, such as night and evening.

Night, in general, refers to the nocturnal period when it is dark. For example:

Nathan works during the day. He sleeps at night.Nathan trabalha durante o dia. Ele dorme à noite.

The preposition at precedes night in this case. In this sense, night is the opposite of day.

While night is usually the moment when many people rest and sleep, evening is a period of time which covers from around 6 p.m. to 10 p.m. It is usually marked by the sun coming down and dinnertime. Observe:

We eat dinner in the evening.Nós jantamos à noite.

In this sense, evening is the beginning of the night. This period goes from the moment the sun sets to the moment people go to bed. Notice the use of in the preceding evening in this case.

In this context, in which evening refers to the beginning of the night, night can serve as a synonym for evening. Observe:

We had a nice happy hour last night.Nós tivemos um happy hour legal na noite passada.

In the previous sentence, night refers to the beginning of the night, which is generally when Happy Hour takes place. Here, the reference is to the same moment mentioned in the example about dinnertime.

Part 2.


92

John worked during the night.John trabalhou durante a noite.

During the night means that the activity lasted throughout the night. In other words, John worked from past midnight until the next morning. The word during implies the action continued for a whole period, from beginning to end.

There are other periods of the day besides evening and night. They are:

Last night refers to the previous night or evening. Note that you say last night and not last evening. This is a matter of usage, even though they are synonymous concepts in this case.

The word night can also be used to talk about a moment late at night. For example:

To locate an action in each of these periods, it will be necessary to use prepo-sitions. When we do so, these periods become adverbs of time. Take a look:

morningmanhã

PERIODS OF THE DAY

afternoontarde

in the morningde manhã

ADVERBS OF TIME

in the afternoonde tarde

in the evening / at nightde noite

in the nightde madrugada

Take notice of a slight difference in meaning: in the night is the same as after midnight and throughout late hours. At night refers to night as the very end of the day.



93

In written English, the days of the week always start in capital letters, even when these words do not come at the beginning of the sentence. To use days of the week as adverbs of time, we must also use the preposition on. Observe:

Fractionating time in periods of the day is a way to measure time chronologically, but there are other ways to do so. For instance, there are seven days in a week. And they are:

weekdaysdias úteis

Mondaysegunda-feira

Tuesdayterça-feira

Wednesdayquarta-feira

Thursdayquinta-feira

Fridaysexta-feira

DAYS OF THE WEEK

weekendf inal de semana

Saturdaysábado

Sundaydomingo

on Mondayna segunda-feira

ADVERBS OF TIME

on Tuesdayna terça-feira

on the weekendno f inal de semana



94

The preposition in is used with years. Years are expressed in cardinal numbers. In general, there are two ways of saying years in English. For instance, 2018 reads two thousand eighteen or twenty eighteen.

It is also possible to fractionate time into non-specif ic periods, such as for a while. Observe it in a sentence:

When talking about events taking place in the course of the week, we cannot use on. The appropriate word is during. Observe:

For a while is used to refer to a vague period of time. In other words, it would be the same as saying an action or event occurred for some time, but without defining an exact duration.

Some terms set actions or events more precisely on a timeline, such as before, used to refer to something that precedes an action. Note the example:

during the weekdurante a semana

Time can also be fractionated into years. And it is possible to place actions and events on a timeline using years as a time reference. For instance:

France won the World Cup in 2018.A França ganhou a Copa do Mundo em 2018.

You explain the problem for a while. Your boss even ignores some calls.Você explica o problema por um tempo. Seu chefe até ignora algumas ligações.

You have probably heard this expression before.Você provavelmente ouviu essa expressão antes.

The word before indicates something that happened at a moment that precedes the current moment, but without saying exactly when.



Observe the word probably, which implies probability, placed between have and heard. This verb form is called present perfect and it is largely used to indicate that an action occurred at an indefinite moment in the past.

Observe another sentence with the word before:

You have gone through something like this before.Você passou por algo assim antes.

The word before comes at the end of the sentence implying that something happened at a moment that precedes now, without being specif ic. This sentence is in the present perfect, too. Once again, the idea is that something took place sometime in the past. Note that gone through is a conjugation of the phrasal verb to go through, which means to experience a diff icult or complicated situation.

The opposite of before is after, which refers to a moment in time that is subsequent to another. Take a look at an example:

Toni left for a happy hour with her colleagues after work.Toni saiu para um happy hour com seus colegas depois do trabalho.

After marks a moment following another. This moment is specif ied: after work. In this sentence, the context gives a more precise idea of the moment when the action happened.

There are other ways to specify a point in a timeline, such as at the end. Observe the example:

At the end of the conversation, you leave his office with clear directions on what to do.

No final da conversa, você sai da sala dele com uma orientação clara sobre o que fazer.

In this sentence, at the end means the person will only leave the off ice when the conversation is over. The opposite of at the end would be at the beginning.



The word after can also be used in other cases. There are expressions with it that are not always going to refer to the moment that follows an event or an action. For example:

After all, no one likes to be ignored, do they?Afinal, ninguém gosta de ser ignorado, não é?

In this context, the expression after all is the same as in conclusion. It does not imply a moment following an event or action.

The word time is also used to form some specif ic expressions, such as:

Matt had finished his report on time before he started his new assignment.Matt tinha terminado seu relatório no prazo antes de começar sua nova tarefa.

The expression on time means at the exact or correct time. The previous sentence states that the report was f inished on schedule, within the planned or arranged deadline.

There is another expression with the word time, which is in time. Observe it in context:

Matt finished his report in time to leave for a happy hour with his colleagues.Matt terminou seu relatório a tempo de sair para um happy hour com seus colegas.

In time means that something is done early enough or in due time to do something else. Also, note that in time comes followed by a verb in the infinitive form, in this case, to leave.

Now, if you add just right before in time, the idea changes a bit. Observe:

Matt finished his report just in time to leave for a happy hour with his colleagues.Matt terminou seu relatório bem na hora de sair para um happy hour com seus colegas.

In this sentence, the meaning is that something happened minutes or seconds before the deadline.



There is another expression that conveys this same idea: in the nick of time. It means right at the last moment, as if the person almost could not manage to make it within the arranged time.

The expression to pay attention means to give full attention to something or someone. To is a dependent preposition here, that is, it must be used in this expression to introduce the person or thing that one is being attentive to.

There is something else that could be said about quality time:

Quality time is showing your partner or your colleague that you are paying attention to them.

Tempo de qualidade é mostrar ao seu parceiro ou seu colega que você está prestando atenção neles.

just in timebem na hora

in the nick of timebem no último momento / aos quarenta e cinco do segundo tempo

EXPRESSIONS WITH “TIME”

Time can also be qualif ied as good or bad, well-used or not, which is expressed by the term quality time. For instance:

Quality time is making time for your partner or your colleague.Tempo de qualidade é dedicar tempo para seu parceiro ou seu colega.

To make time is an expression that means to set time aside or book some time in your schedule in order to dedicate it to someone or something.

Besides the verb to make, there are other verbs commonly used to talk about time. Take a look at the next sentence:



To pass time means to do something so as to make time seem to go by faster. Another way to say that is to use the expression to kill time.

Observe another expression with the word time:

The boss showed that the time you spent in his office was dedicated to you.O chefe mostrou que o tempo que você passou no escritório

dele foi dedicado a você.

Spent is the irregular verb to spend conjugated in the simple past. The expression to spend time means to use time doing something specif ic.

There is also the expression to pass time. Observe:

John missed his bus, so he’s reading a book to pass time until the next one.John perdeu o ônibus dele, então ele está lendo um livro para passar o tempo até

o próximo.

Nicole was late for the meeting, so her colleagues tried to buy time with the boss.

A Nicole estava atrasada para a reunião, então os colegas dela tentaram ganhar tempo com o chefe.

The verb to buy means to obtain something in exchange for payment, but the expression to buy time has nothing to do with purchases. This expression means to deliberately do something in order to have more time available for something else.

Besides the specif ic verbs to talk about time, some expressions are very specif ic. Such as:

Time goes by fast when we’re having fun.O tempo passa rápido quando estamos nos divertindo.

Time goes by is a phrasal verb that means to move in the space of time. In this context, you can also say time passes. Note that is different from saying to pass time. When we say time passes we refer to the rhythm that time goes by. To pass time, is used to say that someone will do something to keep busy and make time seem to go by faster.



Now you know the periods of the day and days of the week, some of the verbs used to talk about the course of time, and

some idiomatic expressions.

There is another expression about time, which is to fly by. See that in an example:

Trey worked so hard, it seemed the week had flown by.Trey trabalhou tão duro, pareceu que a semana passou voando.

Had flown by is a conjugation of to fly by which means to go faster. The expression is not to be understood literally, it conveys a fast speed at which time passes.

Here there is one more expression about time:

Jessica wanted the report today, but Ted told her Rome wasn’t built in a day.Jessica queria o relatório hoje, mas Ted falou pra ela que Roma não foi

construída em um dia.

The expression Rome wasn’t built in a day is not to be taken literally. It means that patience is needed for good things, and that it is necessary to know how to wait.

Another expression that cannot be taken literally is:

I wasn’t born yesterday.Eu não nasci ontem.

Yesterday indicates a specif ic time: the day before today. To be born means coming to the world. However, in this context, it is not about someone’s birth date. This expression means that the speaker does not think he or she is naive, that is, an innocent person who is easily tricked.




Activity A – Answers1. Monday2. Tuesday3. Wednesday4. Thursday5. Friday6. Saturday

7. Sunday8. in the morning9. at night10. in the afternoon11. on the weekend12. during the week

Activity B – Answers1. After all2. on time3. pass time / kill time

4. in time5. in6. for a while



( 1 ) segunda-feira

( 2 ) terça-feira

( 3 ) quarta-feira

( 4 ) quinta-feira

( 5 ) sexta-feira

( 6 ) sábado

( 7 ) domingo

( 8 ) de manhã

( 9 ) à noite

( 10 ) à tarde

( 11 ) no f inal de semana

( 12 ) durante a semana

( ) Wednesday

( ) Sunday

( ) in the afternoon

( ) Tuesday

( ) in the morning

( ) on the weekend

( ) Saturday

( ) Thursday

( ) during the week

( ) at night

( ) Monday

( ) Friday

1. , no one likes to be ignored, do they? Afinal, ninguém gosta de ser ignorado, não é?

2. Matt had finished his report before he started his new assignment. Matt tinha terminado seu relatório no prazo antes de começar sua nova tarefa.

3. John missed his bus, so he’s reading a book to until the next one. John perdeu o ônibus dele, então ele está lendo um livro para passar o tempo até o próximo.

4. Matt finished his report to leave for a happy hour with his colleagues. Matt terminou seu relatório a tempo de sair para um happy hour com seus colegas.

5. France won the World Cup 2018. A França ganhou a Copa do Mundo em 2018.

6. You explain the problem . Your boss even ignores some calls. Você explica o problema por um tempo. Seu chefe até ignora algumas ligações.

Part 3.

Activities



In the vocabulary part of this chapter, you learned that there are many ways to talk about chronological time. Now you will explore some verb forms to understand where they place the action on a timeline.

The simple past is normally used to talk about actions that happened at a definite moment in the past. And this will either be clear in the context or there will be an adverb that places the action on a timeline. For instance:

Won is the verb to win in the simple past. At the end of the sentence, there is an indication of a definite moment in the past that is already over: in 2018. Here it is possible to know exactly when the action took place. But that is not always the case. This indication can be implied in a more general context.

Regular verbs will be conjugated in the simple past by adding the suff ix -ed. Irregular verbs do not follow this rule and the conjugations vary. As for the verb to be, there are two possible conjugations: was and were.

Despite these two possible variations in the conjugation, the structure of the aff irmative form is the same regardless of the main verb: subject + main verb + complement. This complement may be necessary or not. It will depend on the verb.

Observe:

France won the World Cup in 2018.A França ganhou a Copa do Mundo em 2018.

SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS

SIMPLE PAST

Affirmative form – Verb to be and other verbs

subject + main verb + complementsujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Part 4.


102

The negative form of the simple past, both for regular and irregular verbs, except for the verb to be, is going to be built with the auxiliary verb did.

When to be is the main verb in the simple past, there will be no auxiliary verb. Compare the structures:

SIMPLE PAST

Negative form – Other verbs, except to be

subject + auxiliary verb did + not + main verb + complementsujeito + verbo auxiliar did + not + verbo principal + complemento

Negative form – Verb to be

subject + main verb + not + complementsujeito + verbo principal + not + complemento

It is important to mention that the verb to be will be conjugated in the past, as was or were, depending on the subject. On the other hand, the other verbs will not be conjugated in the past – they all remain in the base form.

As for the interrogative form of the verbs which are different from the verb to be, you will also use the auxiliary verb did. To form the interrogative of the verb to be, as you already know, you will not need an auxiliary. However, there will be another kind of change in the structure of the sentences. Observe:

SIMPLE PAST

Interrogative form – Other verbs

auxiliary verb did + subject + main verb + complementverbo auxiliar did + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Interrogative form – Verb to be

main verb + subject + complementverbo principal + sujeito + complemento



103

To talk about something that happened in the past, but still has an effect on the present, the verb form will be the present perfect.

One of the functions of the present perfect is to refer to an action that has two points of reference on a timeline: one in the past, another in the present.

The structure of the aff irmative form of the present perfect is as follows:

Note that the auxiliary verb did will be placed at the beginning of the sentence, before the subject, for verbs that are not to be. And these verbs will remain in the base form. As for the interrogative form of the verb to be, it will be placed before the subject and conjugated accordingly.

When you use a timeline as reference, the simple past places the action at one specif ic point in the past. Observe:

SIMPLE PAST

TIMELINE

past present

PRESENT PERFECTAffirmative form

subject + have/has + main verb in the past participle + complementsujeito + have/has + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

The present perfect is composed of the auxiliary verb have which is conjugated in the present according to the subject. That means that in the third person singular, the auxiliary will be conjugated as has.

The main verb will be in the past participle. The general rule for regular verbs is to add the suff ix -ed to form the past participle. As for the irregular verbs, there is no general rule. Each of them will have a particular formation.

X



104

The f irst element in this sentence is the subject, in this case, Jennifer. Afterward, we have the auxiliary verb conjugated in the present according to the subject: has. The main verb, to live, is regular. Regular verbs form their past participle with -ed, hence live becomes lived. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

This sentence connects the past to the present. For six years refers to the period in which this situation has taken place. The idea it conveys is that it started in the past and its effects or consequences are still relevant today.

Although the present perfect has a connection to both present and past, it does not necessarily have an idea of continuity as shown in the previous example. It is just one of the uses of the present perfect.

This is how the present perfect places events on a timeline:

As already mentioned, the present perfect refers to an action that occurred in the past but has an effect or relevance on the present. For example:


Jennifer has lived in New York for six years.Jennifer mora em Nova York há seis anos.


You have heard this expression before.Você ouviu essa expressão antes.

TIMELINE

The word before in the last example refers to any moment in the past until now. The focus of the present perfect in this case is to express the effect this action has on the present.

As for the structure of the sentence, f irst, there is the subject, you. Then, the auxiliary verb have, which is conjugated in the present, according to the subject. Right after that, we have the main verb, heard, which is the past participle of the irregular verb to hear. And the rest is the complement.

past presentX




First, we have the subject, you, followed by the auxiliary verb have. The main verb comes in the past participle. In this case, we have a phrasal verb, gone through. The rest of the sentence is the complement. The structure is the same: subject + auxiliary verb have + verb in the past participle.

The word before reinforces the idea of an action that started in the past, but has its effects on the present.

To ask a question in the present perfect, the structure will be as follows:


You have gone through something like this before.Você passou por algo assim antes.

TIMELINE

PRESENT PERFECTInterrogative form

auxiliary verb have + subject + main verb in the past participle + complement

verbo auxiliar have + sujeito + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

Have you heard this expression before?Você ouviu essa expressão antes?

In the previous example, the auxiliary verb have is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the subject you, the main verb in the past participle, heard, and then the complement of the sentence. So the structure in the interrogative form is: auxiliary verb have + subject + main verb + complement.

past presentX



In the negative form, there will be a change in the structure seen so far:

The auxiliary verb must be conjugated according to the subject. With subjects in the third person singular, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated as has. In the negative form, has will be followed by not: has not. In the contracted form it will be hasn’t.

With all the other subjects, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated as have. In the negative form, the auxiliary verb will be followed by not: have not. The contracted form is haven’t.

There is another verb form that uses the same basic structure of sentence formation as the present perfect: the past perfect. This verb form is also going to be built with the verb to have. In this case, however, it is conjugated in the past. Observe:

PRESENT PERFECTNegative form

subject + auxiliary verb have + not + main verb in the past participle + complement

sujeito + verbo auxiliar have + not + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

You haven’t heard this expression before.Você não ouviu essa expressão antes.

PAST PERFECTAffirmative form

subject + auxiliary verb had + main verb in the past participle + complement

sujeito + verbo auxiliar had + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

In a general way, the past perfect is used to refer to an action that happened in the past before another action, event or moment also in the past. Therefore, it is the past of another past. Observe the timeline.



The past perfect is used to describe action 1, which happened sometime in the past, before something else happened, represented by action 2, that is, the most recent action on the timeline. That’s why the past perfect is used to refer to the past of the past.

Since the past perfect is used to talk about an action that happened before another one, it is common for a sentence in the past perfect to be followed by another in the simple past.

However, sometimes, the f irst action will be determined by a time reference in the past, such as a date, or an event. For example:

action 1 action 2 past perfect past before the past

PAST PERFECT


Jennifer had moved to New York before 2008.Jennifer tinha se mudado para Nova York antes de 2008.

Here, the action is Jennifer had moved, and the time reference is before 2008. That points out that this action occurred before a given moment in the past. In this case, the simple past is not necessary because there is not a second, most recent action. The time reference is enough to clarify when the action occurred.

However, when the past perfect has another action in the past as a reference, the simple past is used to express the most recent action. Observe:

X



The previous sentence refers to two actions in the past. The first one is described in the past perfect: had prepared. The second action is described in the simple past: went. This is what happened after the f irst action. The sentence which describes action 2 starts with then, a word used to indicate that something happens after something else.

So according to the timeline, the past perfect refers to a moment in the past that happened before another moment, also in the past.


Sally had prepared her presentation. Then, she went to the meeting.Sally tinha preparado a apresentação dela. Então ela foi para a reunião.

action 1 action 2 past perfect simple past


Matt had finished his report before he started his new assignment.Matt tinha terminado seu relatório antes dele começar sua nova tarefa.

action 1 action 2 past perfect simple past


This sentence describes two actions in the past. The first one is described in the past perfect: Matt had finished. This happened before the second one, which is in the simple past: he started.

The previous example used the word before to connect the sentences. The opposite of before is after, and it is also used to connect two actions that took place in the past. For instance:

X

X



The f irst sentence is in the past perfect: Nicole and Peter had worked together. This is the f irst action, the one farther into the past. For a while means for some time. Before marks the most recent action that is in the simple past: they changed jobs. The action of changing jobs happened after they had worked together for a while.

To form the negative form in the past perfect, the structure will be different than the one seen so far. Observe:


After John had missed his bus, he read a book to pass time until the next one.

Depois que o John perdeu o ônibus dele, ele leu um livro pra passar o tempo até o próximo.

The word after is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the f irst action that happened, which is in the past perfect: John had missed. It is followed by the action in the simple past, he read a book. This is the latter action, he read after missing the bus.



Nicole and Pete had worked together for a while before they changed jobs.

Nicole e Pete tinham trabalhado juntos por um tempo antes de eles trocarem de emprego.

PAST PERFECTNegative form

subject + had + not + main verb in the past participle + complementsujeito + had + not + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento



The past perfect forms its negative following the same structure as the present perfect, that is, by adding the particle not after the auxiliary verb.

Observe a sentence in the negative form of the past perfect:

The second sentence is in the negative form of the past perfect, so it expresses the action that happened f irst. Hadn’t is the contraction of had and not. Met is the main verb in the past participle. The f irst sentence has was, which is the verb to be conjugated in the simple past. This sentence indicates the most recent action.

The simple past can be used for both actions, especially when they are marked by the words before and after. That is because these words make already clear which action happened f irst and which one happened next.

The next topic of the lesson is tag questions. Tag questions are small questions that can follow a statement. Generally, they can be answered by yes or no. A tag question will always come after a statement, be it aff irmative or negative. Tag questions will not follow interrogative sentences.

For example:

PAST PERFECTNegative form

Nicole was happy to see her boss. They hadn’t met for a while.A Nicole estava feliz em ver o chefe dela. Eles não tinham se encontrado

havia um tempo.

TAG QUESTIONSNegative statement + Affirmative tag question

It’s not that hard, is it?Não é tão dif ícil, não é?

The question is it? is a tag question. The subject in the sentence is it and the following verb is to be in the simple present in its contracted form, which is why there is an apostrophe -S. The verb is followed by not, which makes this statement a negative one.

The tag question is in the same verb form as the one used in the statement: the simple present. However, it is in the interrogative structure: the verb to be is conjugated as is, followed by the same subject from the statement, it.



That’s is the contraction of that is and refers to the context mentioned beforehand. The statement is in the affirmative form of the simple present, so the tag question is in the negative form: isn’t. The tag question repeats the subject in the form of a subject pronoun. The subject is the situation represented by that. In this sentence’s case, this is a rhetorical question that reinforces what was said before, but grammatically speaking, we could answer it with yes, it is or no, it isn’t.

Tag questions can also be formed in the present perfect. For example:

An affirmative statement will be followed by a negative tag question. Observe:

TAG QUESTIONSAffirmative statement + Negative tag question

You leave your boss’s office with clear directions on what to do. That’s something else, isn’t it?

Você sai da sala do seu chefe com orientações claras sobre o que fazer. Isso é outra coisa, não é?

TAG QUESTIONSPresent Perfect

You haven’t gone through something like that, have you?Você não passou por algo assim, passou?

Since the auxiliary verb in the present perfect is have, it will be used in the tag question. The statement is negative, as marked by haven’t, the contraction of have and not. So the tag question will be in the aff irmative: have you.

Now, observe an example in the simple past:

TAG QUESTIONSSimple Past

Nicole didn’t go to happy hour with her colleagues, did she?Nicole não foi para o happy hour com seus colegas, não é?



This sentence also uses an auxiliary verb because it is conjugated in the simple past of the verb to go in the negative form. If the statement is in the negative, the tag question will be in the affirmative: did she. The subject of the statement is Nicole. It is a name that represents the female third person singular. That is why she is used in the tag question.

In the tag question, the subject must be a subject pronoun.

In some verb forms, auxiliary verbs can also be used when the statement is in the aff irmative form:

Since this sentence is in the aff irmative form of the present perfect, it has an auxiliary verb. Considering the statement is in the affirmative form, the tag question will be in the negative: haven’t you.

Some verb forms, such as the simple past, do not require an auxiliary verb to form the aff irmative. But if they require an auxiliary verb in the negative form, it must be used to form the tag question. For example:

TAG QUESTIONSNegative form

You have gone through something like that, haven’t you?Você já passou por algo assim, não é?


Nicole went to the happy hour with her colleagues, didn’t she?Nicole foi para o happy hour com seus colegas, não foi?

Went is the conjugation of the verb to go in the simple past. As the statement is in the aff irmative form, there is no auxiliary verb. However, the auxiliary verb did must be used to form questions in the simple past, so it must also be used in the tag question: didn’t she. The subject pronoun she represents Nicole.

Observe another example in the simple past:



In this chapter, you learned how to use different verb forms to place actions and events on a timeline, and that depending on the message you want to convey, you can use a verb form or another. You reviewed

the simple past, and learned about the present perfect and the past perfect. Finally, you learned how to form tag questions. If you want

to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Irregular Verbs – Past Participle Page 221Past Perfect Page 243Present Perfect Page 246Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 270Tag Questions Page 298


We had a nice happy hour last night, didn’t we?Nós tivemos um happy hour legal na noite passada, não tivemos?

The statement is in the aff irmative form so there is no need for an auxiliary verb. In this case, had is the conjugation of the verb to have in the simple past. Since the statement is in the aff irmative form, the tag question will be in the negative. Since we need to keep the same verb form, which is the simple past, we will use the auxiliary verb did. It becomes didn’t we.




Part 5.

Activities

1. Nicole wasn’t happy to see her boss, ? Nicole não estava feliz de ver seu chefe, não é?

2. You have gone through something like that, ? Você passou por algo assim, não é?

3. Jennifer has lived in New York for six years, ? Jennifer vive em Nova York há seis anos, não é?

4. Nicole went to the happy hour with her colleagues, ? Nicole foi para o happy hour com seus colegas, não é?

5. They hadn’t met for a while, ? Eles não tinham se encontrado há um tempo, não é?

6. Sally had prepared her presentation, ? Sally tinha preparado sua apresentação, não é?

7. She went to the meeting, ? Ela foi para a reunião, não foi?

8. We didn’t win the World Cup in 2018, ? Nós não ganhamos a Copa do Mundo em 2018, não é?

A. Complete the sentences with the correct tag question.

B. Fill in the blanks using the verb in parentheses in the correct verb form.

1. Nicole and Pete together for a while before they changed jobs. (to work)

Nicole e Pete tinham trabalhado juntos por um tempo antes de eles trocarem de emprego.


1. had worked2. had missed3. was4. started5. have heard6. had prepared

1. was she2. haven’t you3. hasn’t she4. didn’t she

5. had they6. hadn’t she7. didn’t she8. did we


2. John his bus, so he read a book to pass time until the next one. (to miss)

John tinha perdido o ônibus dele, então ele leu um livro pra passar o tempo até o próximo.

3. Nicole happy to see her boss. They hadn’t met for a while. (to be)

A Nicole estava feliz de ver o chefe dela. Eles não tinham se encontrado havia um tempo.

4. Matt had finished his report before he his new assignment. (to start)

Matt tinha terminado seu relatório antes de ele começar sua nova tarefa.

5. You this expression before. (to hear)

Você ouviu essa expressão antes.

6. Sally her presentation. Then, she went to the meeting. (to prepare)

Sally tinha preparado a apresentação dela. Então ela foi para a reunião.


Acts of ServiceActs of Service

5

Chapter 5



In the previous episodes, we talked about how people management has evolved with time. We explained the different personality profiles and we learned the f irst two languages of appreciation: words of aff irmation and quality time. Now, the language we are going to approach involves getting your hands dirty to help colleagues.

In day-to-day work, we commonly go through a moment of overwork. Sometimes, we are so caught up in our tasks, worried about doing things the best way and “getting the job done”, that we don’t even remember to ask colleagues for help when things get hard. On the other hand, there are those who don’t feel all that comfortable asking others for help. After all, everyone has their own tasks to do.

That’s when the language known as “Acts of Service” makes a difference.

This language of appreciation is a clear demonstration of good will and proactivity. When you lend a helping hand to a colleague who is clearly busy, before they even ask you, it shows that you value them. And this help doesn’t mean doing the other person’s job. Any minimal action, however simple it may be, will show your concern for the person and they will feel valued. It’s reassuring to look around in a diff icult moment and know that someone is there for you.

We go through many situations like this every day.

When you get home with the groceries and a neighbor helps you with the bags, when someone drops something next to you and you pick it up and give it back to them, when you are maneuvering your car in a parking lot and the janitor helps you park your car in the parking space… All of these actions are quite simple from a technical point of view, but

ACTS OF SERVICE

In this chapter, you will learn some phrasal verbs, idiomatic expressions, some uses of the verb to get, and also how to talk about some professions.

Now, look at the script of Acts of Service.

Part 1.


118

they bring a very important value. In the workplace, situations in which it is possible to apply this language of appreciation are countless.

For example, a salesperson who helps the stock controller to carry a box to the deposit; someone who helps an insecure colleague to pass the slides during a presentation; or an executive who opens the door for the kitchen assistant carrying a heavy tray to come into the meeting room to serve everyone coffee.

The language of the Acts of Service plays an important role in building a more enjoyable and welcoming work environment. And it should be used by anyone in the company. There are so many challenges that professionals face daily at work that having a pleasant environment becomes fundamental to good people management. And in the end, the team will be grateful!

ATOS DE SERVIÇO

Nos episódios anteriores, falamos sobre como a gestão de pessoas evoluiu com o tempo. Explicamos os diversos perf is comportamentais e conhecemos as duas primeiras linguagens da valorização pessoal: as palavras de afirmação e o tempo de qualidade. Agora, a linguagem que vamos abordar envolve colocar a mão na massa para ajudar os colegas.

No dia a dia do trabalho, é comum passarmos por algum momento de excesso de serviço. Às vezes estamos tão envolvidos com as nossas tarefas, preocupados em fazer as coisas da melhor maneira e em “dar conta do recado”, que nem lembramos de pedir ajuda aos colegas quando a coisa aperta. Por outro lado, há aqueles que não se sentem tão à vontade pedindo ajuda para os outros. Afinal, todos têm suas próprias tarefas para cumprir.

É aí que a linguagem conhecida como “Atos de Serviço” faz a diferença.

Essa linguagem da valorização pessoal é uma demonstração clara de boa vontade e de proatividade. Quando você oferece uma mão a um colega claramente atarefado antes mesmo dele pedir, isso mostra que você o valoriza. E essa ajuda não signif ica fazer o trabalho do outro.



119

Qualquer ação mínima, por mais simples que seja, já demonstra a sua preocupação com a pessoa e ela vai se sentir valorizada. É reconfortante olhar ao redor em um momento de aperto e saber que alguém está ali para te ajudar.

Nós passamos por várias situações desse tipo no nosso cotidiano.

Quando você chega em casa com as compras e um vizinho te ajuda com as sacolas; quando alguém deixa cair algo no chão e você se abaixa para pegar e devolve para a pessoa; quando você está manobrando em um estacionamento e o zelador te ajuda a colocar seu carro na vaga. Todas essas atitudes são muito simples de um ponto de vista técnico, mas trazem consigo um valor muito importante. No ambiente de trabalho, as situações em que é possível aplicar essa linguagem da valorização são inúmeras.

Por exemplo, um vendedor que ajuda o estoquista a carregar uma caixa até o depósito; alguém que ajuda o colega inseguro a passar os slides durante uma apresentação para toda a equipe; ou ainda, uma executiva que abre a porta para a copeira com a bandeja pesada conseguir entrar na sala de reunião para servir café para todos.

A linguagem dos Atos de Serviço desempenha um papel importante na construção de um ambiente de trabalho mais agradável e acolhedor. E ela deveria ser usada por qualquer um na empresa. São tantos os desafios que os profissionais enfrentam no dia a dia do trabalho, que ter um ambiente agradável se torna fundamental para uma boa gestão de pessoas. No f inal, a equipe agradece!




As seen previously, there are different types of languages of appreciation. One of them is known as acts of service, which are manifestations of our concern or attention towards others, be it in the work environment or in the personal sphere.

Observe this sentence about the acts of service:

Note the expression getting your hands dirty. In this context, it means performing a physical task, such as something that requires a big deal of effort, which you would normally use your hands or arms to do.

However, depending on the context, the expression to get your hands dirty can bring a negative connotation. In this case, it can mean to do something that goes against your principles or values. For example:

The language we are going to approach involves getting your hands dirty to help colleagues.

A linguagem que vamos abordar envolve colocar a mão na massa para ajudar os colegas.

In this context, to get his hands dirty is in the sense of doing something wrong or illegal. There is a second verb to get in this sentence: he got his assistant. Got is the conjugation of the verb to get in the simple past. It conveys the idea that someone persuades somebody else to do something. It is used in a causative construction, which is to get someone to do something.

The verb to get can be used in a great variety of contexts, phrasal verbs, and idiomatic expressions. Here is another example of an idiomatic expression with the verb to get:

The mayor wasn’t arrested because he got his assistant to get his hands dirty for him.

O prefeito não foi preso porque ele fez seu assistente sujar as suas mãos por ele.

Part 2.


121

We are caught up in our tasks, worried about “getting the job done”.Nós estamos envolvidos em nossas tarefas, preocupados em “dar conta do recado”.

Here, to be caught up in something means to f ind yourself in an unpleasant or uncomfortable situation. We are caught up is a passive formation with the verb to be followed by a past participle. In this case, the verb to be is conjugated in the simple past as were, and caught up is the past participle of the phrasal verb to catch up.

To catch up may have another meaning. For instance:

To get the job done means to do what you have to do and f inish it.

The phrasal verb to be caught up means to be so involved or focused on something that we do not pay attention to anything else. The preposition in is a dependent preposition that connects to be caught to its complement, which in this case is our task.

However, depending on the context, the meaning of this phrasal verb can change. Observe the sentence:

Mary and Paul were caught up in traffic. That’s why they were late for the meeting.Mary e Paul f icaram presos no trânsito. É por isso que eles se atrasaram para a reunião.

Nicole was sick, so she didn’t work last week. Now she has to catch up.Nicole estava doente, então ela não trabalhou na semana passada. Agora

ela tem que tirar o atraso.

In this sentence, to catch up means to spend some time doing something that needs to be done and that you could not do before.

There are other phrasal verbs with the verb to catch, such as to catch on. Observe it in a sentence:

HR started to catch on to the fact that employees wanted to be seen as individuals.

O RH começou a entender que os colaboradores queriam ser vistos como indivíduos.



122

The verb to catch, with the preposition on, forms the phrasal verb to catch on, which means to begin to understand something, to realize something.

There is a passive formation in this sentence as well, which is to be seen. The verb to be is in the infinitive and the verb to see is in the past participle.

Many verbs and expressions in English can have various meanings, and sometimes really different ones, depending on the context. The verb to get is a good example of this. In some contexts, it has a sense of transition from one state to another. That is commonly expressed by the use of get + adjective.

For example:

The verb to get is followed by the adjective demotivated, thus conveying the idea of transition. In this sentence, the verb to get brings out the feeling that makes something happen that was not happening before.

Many phrasal verbs can be formed with the verb to get, and they will have specif ic meanings according to the contexts. For example:

We don’t even remember to ask colleagues for help when things get hard.Nós nem lembramos de pedir ajuda aos colegas quando a coisa aperta.

In this sentence, the verb to get is followed by the adjective hard, which means difficult. Here, get is the same as to become. It conveys an idea of transition from one state to another, of a thing that was not diff icult before but later became diff icult.

Observe another sentence with to get + adjective:

Employees get demotivated when employers don’t show appreciation.Funcionários f icam desmotivados quando empregadores não mostram que os

valorizam.

Ted was very busy today. He didn’t get around to calling his wife.Ted estava muito ocupado hoje. Ele não conseguiu ligar para a esposa dele.

In this context, to get around to doing something means to do something you have already been planning to do, but for some reason, you could not do it yet.

But this meaning can change in a different context:



123

In this sentence, the phrasal verb to look around means to search. Notice it is followed by the preposition for to connect the verb with the complement.

But in a different context, the meaning of this phrasal verb can change. Observe:

The news that Sally was fired got around fast.A notícia de que Sally foi demitida circulou rápido.

In this case, to get around means to spread, in the sense that the news or the gossip about something has spread. It refers to information that became known to many people.

There is another phrasal verb formed with the word around: to look around. For example:

Jackie started to look around for a new job the minute she was fired.Jackie começou a procurar por um novo emprego no minuto em que ela foi demitida.

It’s reassuring to look around in a difficult moment and know that someone is there for you.

É reconfortante olhar ao redor em um momento de aperto e saber que alguém está ali para te ajudar.

In this sentence, to look around means to literally observe your surroundings. It carries a literal meaning. Still in the same sentence, the word reassuring is the same as comforting. These are adjectives and both end in the suff ix -ing. In both cases, reassuring and comforting are adjectives formed with the suff ix -ing. However, this suff ix can be used in the formation of other words such as helping.

Observe this word in a sentence:

When you lend a helping hand to a colleague who is busy, it shows that you value them.

Quando você oferece uma mão a um colega atarefado, isso mostra que você o valoriza.

The expression to lend a hand means to help or give assistance. In this sentence, the expression is emphasized by helping. This word attributes a characteristic to the word hand, reinforcing the meaning of the expression, which is to help someone.



The verb to lend is used in the expression to lend a helping hand, but in other contexts it has a different meaning. For example:

Lauryn is going to lend her laptop to Ted so he can work this weekend.A Lauryn vai emprestar o computador portátil dela para o Ted para que ele

possa trabalhar neste f inal de semana.

In this context, to lend means to allow someone to use something for some time, and then return it later. The use of to indicates the person to whom you are lending something.

There is another verb that can be used in this situation, to describe another perspective: to borrow. Look at it in a sentence:

Ted is going to borrow the laptop from Lauryn so he can work this weekend.

O Ted vai pegar o computador portátil da Lauryn emprestado para que ele possa trabalhar neste f inal de semana.

To borrow means to be allowed to use something that belongs to someone else for some time and return it later. The preposition used here is from, which indicates the origin, meaning the person to whom the laptop belongs to.

In short:

TO LEND X TO BORROW

We lend something to someone.Nós emprestamos algo para alguém.

We borrow something from someone.Nós pegamos algo emprestado de alguém.

Lending a computer or a mouse to a coworker that has diff iculty with their jobs is an act of service. Another example of an act of service is:



In this sentence, the verb to get means to arrive at a place. It is followed by the word home. In general, this word is not used with prepositions.

But it is, however, necessary to use a preposition after the verb to get when talking about arriving at other places other than home. For example:

When you get home with the groceries and a neighbor helps you with the bags.

Quando você chega em casa com as compras e um vizinho te ajuda com as sacolas.

When Mitch gets to France, he is going to visit the Louvre.Quando o Mitch chegar na França, ele vai visitar o Louvre.

Here the verb to get keeps the meaning of arriving and it is followed by the preposition to. This preposition makes the connection between the verb and the location, France. This preposition indicates movement, which means he will visit the Louvre the moment he arrives there.

A common use of the verb to get is as a synonym of the verb to bring. Bringing something to work for your coworkers to eat or drink can be an example of an act of service. Observe:

Michelle was a nice colleague. She was used to getting coffee for her team every morning.

Michelle era uma colega de trabalho legal. Ela estava acostumada a trazer café para a equipe dela toda manhã.

In this sentence, the verb to get means to take something to someone, in this case, to take coffee to the team.

Here is an example of another act of service in the work environment:

A salesperson who helps the stock controller to carry a box to the deposit.Um vendedor que ajuda o estoquista a carregar uma caixa até o depósito.



A stock controller is a person who controls the stock, in other words, a person who manages the stock belonging to a shop or company.

A salesperson is a person whose job is to sell things. This word can refer to a man or a woman, but there are other words to talk about this type of job:

PROFESSIONS

A salesman is a man who works with sales. A saleswoman refers specif ically to a woman who works with sales.

Salesperson, salesman, or saleswoman are terms used to talk about people that work with sales in general. However, the word salesclerk refers to a person who works with sales specifically in a store.

There are other nouns that refer to professions by gender, but that also carry a genderless alternative. For example:

A businesswoman is a woman that works in the business area. A businessman is a man that works in the business area. An executive can refer either to a woman or to a man. It refers to a person with administrative abilities or attributions.

Look at this word in a sentence:

salesmanvendedor

saleswomanvendedora

salesclerkvendedor / atendente de loja

PROFESSIONS

businesswomanmulher de negócios

businessmanhomem de negócios

executiveexecutiva(o)

An executive who opens the door for the kitchen assistant carrying a heavy tray.

Um(a) executivo(a) que abre a porta para a copeira carregando uma bandeja pesada.



Note that an executive in the previous sentence can be either a man or a woman. There is another profession mentioned, which is kitchen assistant. It refers to someone who helps out the chef in the kitchen, by cutting and washing legumes, preparing the kitchen and the ingredients, but not necessarily serving people. A chef is a specialized cook, with a lot of expertise, usually responsible for the kitchen of a restaurant or a hotel. This word can be used to refer to either a man or woman.

In the context of a restaurant, there are also the ones who serve people or wait on them at restaurant tables:

A waiter is necessarily a man. When referring to a woman, the correct word is waitress. Note that server is a genderless word that can be used to both man and woman who wait tables.

PROFESSIONS

waitergarçom

waitressgarçonete

servergarçom/garçonete

Now you know various idiomatic expressions, different usages of the verb to get, and some job positions in English.






( 1 ) emprestar

( 2 ) pegar emprestado

( 3 ) estar absorto / envolvido

( 4 ) tirar o atraso / correr atrás

( 5 ) começar a entender

( 6 ) colocar a mão na massa

( 7 ) vendedor

( 8 ) vendedora

( 9 ) garçom

( 10 ) garçonete

( 11 ) chefe de cozinha

( 12 ) garçom/garçonete

( ) to be caught up

( ) to get your hands dirty

( ) waitress

( ) to lend

( ) saleswoman

( ) to catch up

( ) waiter

( ) server

( ) salesman

( ) chef

( ) to borrow

( ) to catch on

1. The mayor wasn’t arrested because he got his assistant for him. O prefeito não foi preso porque ele fez seu assistente sujar as suas mãos por ele.

2. Mary and Paul in traffic. That’s why they were late for the meeting. Mary e Paul ficaram presos no trânsito. É por isso que eles se atrasaram para a reunião.

3. When Mitch France, he is going to visit the Louvre. Quando o Mitch chegar na França, ele vai visitar o Louvre.

4. When you with the groceries and a neighbor helps you with the bags. Quando você chega em casa com as compras e um vizinho te ajuda com as sacolas.

Part 3.

Activities


Activity A – Answers1. to lend2. to borrow3. to be caught up4. to catch up5. to catch on6. to get your hands dirty

7. salesman8. saleswoman9. waiter10. waitress11. chef12. server

Activity B – Answers1. to get his hands dirty2. were caught up3. gets to4. get home5. get hard6. got around

5. We don’t even remember to ask colleagues for help when things . Nós nem lembramos de pedir ajuda aos colegas quando a coisa aperta.

6. The news that Sally was fired fast. A notícia de que Sally foi demitida circulou rápido.




In the vocabulary part, you saw that some suff ixes can be used in word formation, such as the suff ix -ing, that can be used to form adjectives. It can also be used with verbs in some specif ic situations. One of them is when they are another verb’s verbal complement. For instance:

In this sentence, the verb to get after the verb involves ends in -ing because it works as a verbal complement. In general, verbs that have only one syllable and f inish in consonant, vowel, consonant, or CVC, have their form in -ing built by doubling the last consonant when the vowel is stressed. The verb to get falls into this category and that’s why there is double t in getting.

There’s another verb in the -ing form in the previous sentence: going. It is not a verbal complement in this case. It is part of the structure be + going to. The verb to be is conjugated as are, in the present. In this case, the function of the verb go with -ing is to form a structure that suggests future intention.

To be + going to conveys the idea that you have the intention of doing something. Be + going to works as an auxiliary construction and the main verb that follows will be in its base form. The verb to be functions as the f irst auxiliary verb, and it is the one to be conjugated.

As for the verb to go, it follows the general spelling rule of verbs ending in -ing: simply add the suff ix to the end of the base form of the verb. That’s why to go becomes going.

To speak about an intention in the future, the verb to be will be conjugated in the present. For example:

USES OF VERB + -INGUso de Verbos + -ING

The language we are going to approach involves getting your hands dirty to help colleagues.

A linguagem que vamos abordar envolve colocar a mão na massa para ajudar os colegas.

Part 4.


131

The subject, Lauryn, represents the third person singular. Is is the verb to be conjugated in the present, according to the subject. The verb to lend expresses the main action in the sentence and comes in the base form. On the weekend is the complement, it indicates a moment in the future, reinforcing the idea that this sentence expresses a future intention.

There is a more informal way of using be going to:

TO BE + GOING TO (FUTURE)Affirmative form

subject + to be in the present + going to + main verb in the base formsujeito + to be no presente + going to + verbo principal na forma base

future intentionintenção futura

Lauryn is going to lend her laptop to Ted on the weekend.Lauryn vai emprestar o computador portátil dela para o Ted no f inal de semana.

Lauryn is gonna lend her laptop to Ted on the weekend.Lauryn vai emprestar seu computador portátil para o Ted no final de semana.

Gonna is the contraction of going + to. It does not change the sense of the sentence, but in more informal circumstances, especially in spoken English, gonna can be used more often than going to.

To be + going to can also be used to insist that someone should do something. It is a way to emphasize the fact that something has to be done.

Observe this example:

TO BE + GOING TO (FUTURE)Affirmative form

subject + to be in the present + going to + main verb in the base formsujeito + to be no presente + going to + verbo principal na forma base

commandcomando/ordem

You are going to finish this report today!Você vai terminar este relatório hoje!



132

This sentence does not indicate intention. It almost sounds like a threat, meaning to make sure something gets done. The context is different, but the structure is the same. There is a subject, which in this case is you, followed by the verb to be conjugated according to the subject in the present as are, and after that, going to. The main verb will be in its base form. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

The negative form conveys the idea that you do not have the intention of doing something in the future. You will form it by adding the particle not right after the verb to be.

So, the structure in the negative form of to be + going to is:

The verb to be is conjugated in the present according to the subject, Lauryn is, and followed by the negative particle not. Afterward, there is going to and the main verb in its base form, lend. This sentence indicates the intention of not doing something in the future.

Negative sentences with be + going to can also be used to insist that someone should not do something, in a very emphatic and stern manner. For example:

TO BE + GOING TO (FUTURE)Negative form

subject + to be in the present + not + going to + main verb in the base formsujeito + to be no presente + not + going to + verbo principal na forma base

As you can see, the particle not will be placed right after the auxiliary verb to be.

For example:


future intentionintenção futura

Lauryn is not going to lend her laptop to Ted.A Lauryn não vai emprestar o computador portátil dela para o Ted.



133

The structure remains the same: you is the subject, the verb to be is in the present followed by the particle not, then going to followed by the main verb in the base form. And at the end, the complement. When to be + not is not contracted, the negative sounds more emphatic.

To be + going to can also be used to talk about something that was planned to happen, or should have happened in the past, but for some reason ended up not happening. In this case, the verb to be will be conjugated in the past.

The verb to be has only two conjugations in the past: was for I, he, she, it, and were for we, you, and they.

The structure is the same as the one seen so far. The difference is that the auxiliary verb, to be, will be conjugated in the past.

Observe:

TO BE + GOING TO (PAST)

subject + to be in the past + going to + main verb in the base formsujeito + to be no passado + going to + verbo principal na forma base


commandcomando/ordem

You are not going to leave early today!Vocês não vão sair mais cedo hoje!

This structure is used to talk about something that was supposed to happen. For example:


frustrated planplano frustrado

Lauryn was going to lend her laptop to Ted on the weekend.Lauryn ia emprestar o computador portátil dela para o Ted no f inal de semana.



In this sentence, it is implicit that Lauryn did not manage to do what she intended to. The auxiliary verb to be is conjugated in the past as was. The rest of the structure will remain the same.

Sometimes there will be an explanation as to why the plans did not happen. For instance:

The subject, Denny, represents the third person singular, so the verb to be is conjugated as was. Going to is followed by fire, the main verb in the base form. The sentence conveys the idea that Denny’s assistant was supposed to be f ired, but they had a conversation and she ended up not being f ired after all.

But introduces an explanation for why the assistant was not f ired. Also, note that this explanation is in the simple past: they talked, and then he changed his mind.

Observe this next example:



Denny was going to fire his assistant, but they talked, and he changed his mind.Denny ia demitir a assistente dele, mas eles conversaram e ele mudou de ideia.

O Denny estava para demitir a assistente dele, mas eles conversaram e ele mudou de ideia.



Kelly and Sophie were going to help Mike with a report, but they had a last-minute meeting.

A Kelly e a Sophie iam ajudar o Mike com um relatório, mas elas tiveram uma reunião de última hora.

A Kelly e a Sophie estavam para ajudar o Mike com um relatório, mas elas tiveram uma reunião de última hora.

The subject of the sentence, Kelly and Sophie, represents the third person plural and, therefore, the verb to be has to be conjugated in the past as were. After that, we have going to, and the main verb help in the base form. The reason why the plans fell through is that they had a last-minute meeting.

To be + going to in the past and in the negative form conveys the idea that you ended up doing something you were not planning to do. The reason for that to happen will often be expressed in the simple past.



The f irst part of the sentence shows an intention of not doing something. So, here, Lauryn was planning not to lend her laptop to Ted. However, that was a frustrated plan, since they spoke and she ended up lending it to him.

Going to uses the suff ix -ing, but there is another use for this suff ix. Observe the following example:

The structure will be formed with the particle not:

TO BE + GOING TO (PAST)Negative form

subject + to be in the past + not + going to + main verb in the base formsujeito + to be no passado + not + going to + verbo principal na forma base


Lauryn was not going to lend her laptop to Ted, but they spoke, and she changed her mind.

Lauryn não ia emprestar o computador portátil dela pro Ted, mas eles conversaram e ela mudou de ideia.

TO BE + USED TO + VERB -ING

habitshábitos

Michelle was a nice colleague. She was used to getting coffee for her team every morning.

A Michelle era uma colega de trabalho legal. Ela estava acostumada a trazer café para a equipe dela toda manhã.

She was used to getting coffee refers to a habit in the past. Was is the verb to be in the past, followed by used to and a verb in the -ing form. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

To be used to is a construction that refers to habits, be it current or past ones, depending on whether the verb to be is conjugated in the past or in the present.



In the aff irmative form, the structure will be:

Michael is the subject of the sentence. The verb to be is conjugated in the present, which indicates that this is a current or present habit. To be is followed by used to and the verb to work in the -ing form.

To talk about a past habit that is no longer a habit in the present, the verb to be will be conjugated in the past. For instance:

TO BE + USED TO + VERB -INGAffirmative Form

subject + to be + used to + main verb in the -ing + complementsujeito + to be + used to + verbo principal na forma -ing + complemento

For example:


present habithábito atual

Michael is used to working from home. He is a freelancer.O Michael está acostumado a trabalhar de casa. Ele é um autônomo.


past habithábito passado

Mary was used to waking up early. Now she likes to sleep late.A Mary estava acostumada a acordar cedo. Agora ela gosta de dormir até tarde.

This sentence conveys the idea of a habit that existed in the past and no longer exists. Mary had the habit of getting up early. This is indicated by the use of the verb to be in the past followed by used to. The present habit is introduced by now, and the verb is in the simple present: she likes.

Although the verb to be is conjugated in the past as was, the rest of the structure remains the same.



Michael is the subject, the verb to be is conjugated in the present accordingly, the particle not is followed by used to, and the main verb is in the -ing form. This sentence follows the same structure aforementioned. This sentence conveys the idea that Michael does not have this particular habit.

Observe another example with this structure:

In the negative form the structure will change slightly:

TO BE + USED TO + VERB -INGNegative form

subject + to be + not + used to + main verb in the -ing + complementsujeito + to be + not + used to + verbo principal na forma -ing + complemento

As with other structures seen so far, the particle not will be used in the negative form following the auxiliary verb to be.

For example:


Michael is not used to working from home.O Michael não está acostumado a trabalhar de casa.


Flora and Matt are not used to working on weekends.A Flora e o Matt não estão acostumados a trabalhar nos f inais de semana.

This sentence indicates an absence of habit in the present. Flora and Matt form the subject, which is equivalent to the third person plural. Are is the auxiliary verb to be conjugated according to the subject. Not marks the negative and it is followed by used to working.

To be is not the only auxiliary verb that can be used with used to. The verb to get can also be used as an auxiliary verb to talk about habits. Instead of using to be + used to, you will use to get + used to. Since the verb to get implies an idea of transition, to get used to refers to the process of getting accustomed to something.



In the affirmative form, get + used to will follow the same structure used so far.

Observe:

To get is an irregular verb. It is conjugated as got in the past. The verb to ask comes in the -ing form. This structure refers to the process of acquiring a habit. Here, the verb to get is conjugated in the past, which means that the habit exists today and the process of acquiring it is over now.

Observe now the negative form of this structure:

TO GET + USED TO + VERB -ING Affirmative form

subject + to get (past) + used to + main verb in the -ing formsujeito + to get (passado) + used to + verbo principal na forma -ing

Remember that the verb to get conjugates in the past as got. Also, note that even if we change the auxiliary verb to be for the verb to get, the main verb will remain in the -ing form.

Observe a sentence with to get used to:

TO GET + USED TO + VERB -ING Affirmative form

Joanne got used to waking up early because she started working at 6 in the morning.

A Joanne se acostumou a acordar cedo porque ela começava a trabalhar às seis da manhã.

TO GET + USED TO + VERB -ING Negative form

subject + did not / didn’t + to get (past) + used to + main verb in the -ing formsujeito + did not / didn’t + to get (passado) + used to + verbo principal na

forma -ing



Kate is the subject. Didn’t is the contraction of did not. Get is in the base form. Then comes used to, followed by the main verb in the -ing form and the rest of the sentence is the complement.

These structures are used to talk about habits:

In the negative form of the simple past, note that the verb to get must be preceded by the auxiliary verb did and the negative particle not.

For example:

TO GET USED TO + VERB -ING Negative form

Kate didn’t get used to asking for other people’s help.Kate não se acostumou a pedir ajuda a outras pessoas.

HABITS Hábitos

be (present) + used to hábito adquirido, atual

be (past) + used to hábito que existia no passado

get (past) + used to o processo de se acostumar terminou

In this chapter, you reviewed some spelling rules of verbs ending in -ing, and you also saw how to speak of some habits and

intentions, both in the affirmative and negative forms. You have also learned that the verb to get has many uses. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can refer to the Grammar

Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Be Going To – Future Page 199Be Going To – Past Page 203Used To Page 301Verbs + Infinitive or -ING Page 305




Part 5.

Activities

1. Lauryn is going to lend her laptop to Ted on the weekend. Lauryn vai emprestar o computador portátil dela para o Ted no f inal de semana.

2. You are going to finish this report today! Você vai terminar esse relatório hoje!

3. Ted is going to borrow the laptop from Lauryn so he can work this weekend. O Ted vai pegar o computador portátil da Lauryn emprestado para que ele possa trabalhar neste f inal de semana.

4. Denny was going to fire his assistant. Denny ia demitir a assistente dele.

5. Kelly and Sophie were going to help Mike with a report. A Kelly e a Sophie iam ajudar o Mike com um relatório.

6. She was used to getting coffee for her team every morning. Ela estava acostumada a trazer café para a equipe dela toda manhã.

7. Michael is used to working from home. O Michael está acostumado a trabalhar de casa.

8. Joanne got used to waking up early. A Joanne se acostumou a acordar cedo.

A. Change the sentences into the negative form.


1. Past habit2. Current habit3. Current habit4. Current habit5. Past habit6. Current habit

1. Lauryn is not / isn’t going to lend her laptop to Ted on the weekend.2. You are not / aren’t going to finish this report today!3. Ted is not / isn’t going to borrow the laptop from Lauryn so he can work this weekend.4. Denny was not / wasn’t going to fire his assistant.5. Kelly and Sophie were not / weren’t going to help Mike with a report.6. She was not / wasn’t used to getting coffee for her team every morning.7. Michael is not / isn’t used to working from home. 8. Joanne did not / didn’t get used to waking up early.


B. Analyze the sentences and check if they refer to a current habit or a past habit.

1. Michelle was a nice colleague. She was used to getting coffee for her team every morning.

A Michelle era uma colega de trabalho legal. Ela estava acostumada a trazer café para a equipe dela toda manhã.

( ) Current habit ( ) Past habit

2. Michael is not used to working from home.

O Michael não está acostumado a trabalhar de casa.


3. Kate got used to asking for other people’s help.

Kate se acostumou a pedir ajuda a outras pessoas.


4. Flora and Matt are used to working on weekends.

A Flora e o Matt estão acostumados a trabalhar nos f ins de semana.


5. Mary was used to waking up early. Now she likes to sleep late.

A Mary estava acostumada a acordar cedo. Agora ela gosta de dormir até tarde.


6. Michael is used to working from home. He is a freelancer.

O Michael está acostumado a trabalhar de casa. Ele é um autônomo.



Tangible GiftsTangible Gifts

6

Chapter 6



One of the main goals of people management is to make the work environment more welcoming without jeopardizing the team’s performance. The languages of appreciation allow that to happen, be it through words of aff irmation that help boost self-esteem, through quality time, which makes relationships at work more humane, or through acts of service, which provide strategic support in a moment of higher tension. But do you know what else shows a person that we value them?

Tangible gifts!

This is the fourth language of appreciation we are going to learn.

Who doesn’t like gifts? Tangible gifts can be a good tool to build a solid relationship between people. Besides, they help to improve a team’s mood. We give gifts to our friends to show them how much we appreciate them. We give gifts to a family member to show our love and care. We give gifts to our coworkers to congratulate them on personal or professional achievements.

The reason behind it doesn’t matter. Giving presents is a way to say that you care. But, for this language to work, does the present have to be expensive? Are its cost and the satisfaction of the person who receives it related?

The answer is: no!

Actually, the cost of a gift is what matters the least. Your focus must be on choosing a gift that best conveys the message you want to send. Let’s imagine that a workmate has arrived from a vacation trip

TANGIBLE GIFTS

In this chapter, you will learn some causative verbs and how to express permission. In addition to that, you will learn how to make invitations, give suggestions, and advice. You will also see some important vocabulary and grammar topics to make it happen.

Now, look at the script of Tangible Gifts.

Part 1.


144

and brought you a US$1 fridge magnet because they know you collect magnets from around the world.

What is the message your colleague is sending here?

Let’s observe some facts:

First, they were on vacation when they bought the gift. That is, they remember your friendship even when they’re not at work. Secondly, they bought a gift that has to do with your personality. I mean, they know what you like. And f inally, the gift isn’t determined by any specif ic special date.

Therefore, your workmate didn’t have any obligation to give you a gift when they returned from their trip. They did it because they wanted to. Have you realized that the fact that it cost US$1 didn’t have the slightest importance? Their gesture means much more.

Tangible gifts are a great way to reinforce a relationship, be it in the workplace or in your personal life.

Therefore, always pay attention to the gift’s meaning. An expensive and meaningless gift can have the opposite effect and send the message that you don’t really care for that person.

Let’s suppose a head of department buys a box of chocolates for each team member at the end of the year. He has the boxes delivered without so much as writing a card. In fact, he doesn’t even gift-wrap them. People may have the impression that he is only doing it for the sake of it. It’s like that in the professional life as well as in the personal life.

Let’s imagine the following situation.

It’s your dating anniversary and you decide to do something special with your girlfriend.

To make a good impression, you surprise her and take her to the best steakhouse in town. As you get there, she reminds you that she’s not big on eating meat. It doesn’t matter how much the dinner will cost; it will be of very little value to her. After all, the whole situation implies that you didn’t remember something very important in the relationship, which is: “what would she like to eat?”

Maybe preparing a special dinner at home, together, would have been a better decision.

In short, the greatest value of the gift is the message it conveys. And positive messages are a great tool to transform a professional environment into a more welcoming place.



145

PRESENTES

Um dos principais objetivos da gestão de pessoas é tornar o ambiente de trabalho mais acolhedor sem prejudicar o desempenho da equipe. As linguagens da valorização pessoal permitem isso, seja por meio das palavras de afirmação, que ajudam a levantar a autoestima, do tempo de qualidade, que torna as relações no ambiente de trabalho mais humanas, ou pelos atos de serviço, que dão apoio estratégico em um momento de maior tensão. Mas sabe o que mais cai muito bem quando queremos mostrar para uma pessoa que nós a valorizamos?

Presentes!

Esta é a quarta linguagem da valorização pessoal que nós vamos aprender.

Quem não gosta de receber presentes? Os presentes podem ser uma boa ferramenta na construção de uma relação mais sólida entre as pessoas. Além disso, ajudam a melhorar o clima de uma equipe. Nós presenteamos nossos amigos para demonstrar o quanto os valorizamos. Presenteamos um familiar para mostrar o nosso amor e carinho. Presenteamos um colega de trabalho para parabenizá-lo por uma conquista pessoal ou profissional.

O motivo por trás disso não tem importância. Dar presentes é sempre uma maneira de dizer que você se importa. Mas será que, para essa linguagem funcionar, o presente precisa ser caro? Será que seu custo está relacionado à satisfação da pessoa que o recebe?

A resposta é: não!

Na verdade, o custo do presente é o que menos importa. Você deve focar em escolher o presente que melhor expressa a mensagem que você quer transmitir. Vamos imaginar que um colega de trabalho tenha chegado de uma viagem de férias e te trouxe um ímã de geladeira de 1 dólar, pois sabe que você coleciona ímãs de vários lugares do mundo.

Qual você acha que é a mensagem que seu colega está transmitindo aqui?

Vamos observar alguns fatos:

Em primeiro lugar, ele estava de férias quando comprou o presente. Ou seja, ele lembra da sua amizade mesmo quando não está no trabalho. Em segundo lugar, ele comprou um presente que tem a ver com a sua



146

personalidade. Quer dizer, ele sabe do que você gosta. E, por último, o presente não é determinado por nenhuma data especial.

Portanto, seu amigo do trabalho não tinha nenhuma obrigação de te dar um presente na volta das férias. Ele fez porque quis. Percebeu como o fato de que ele custou 1 dólar não teve a menor importância? O gesto dele signif ica muito mais. Presentes são uma ótima maneira de reforçar uma relação, seja no ambiente de trabalho ou na vida pessoal.

Então, atente-se sempre para o signif icado do presente. Um presente caro e sem signif icado pode ter o efeito oposto e passar a mensagem de que você pouco se importa com a pessoa.

Vamos supor que um chefe de departamento compra uma caixa de bombons para cada um da equipe no f inal do ano. Ele manda entregar as caixas sem nem escrever uma mensagem. Na verdade, ele nem mesmo as embrulha. As pessoas podem ficar com a impressão de que ele está apenas cumprindo tabela. É assim na vida profissional, e é assim também na vida pessoal.

Vamos imaginar a seguinte situação.

Chegou o seu aniversário de namoro e você resolve fazer algo especial com a sua namorada.

Para causar uma boa impressão, você faz uma surpresa e leva ela na melhor churrascaria da cidade. Chegando lá, ela te lembra de que não é muito de comer carne. Não importa quanto o jantar vai custar. Ele vai ter um valor muito pequeno para ela. Afinal, toda a situação implica que você não se lembrou de algo muito importante na relação, que é: “o que ela gostaria de comer?”

Talvez preparar um jantar especial em casa, juntos, teria sido uma decisão melhor.

Em resumo, o maior valor do presente é a mensagem que ele carrega. E mensagens positivas são uma ótima ferramenta para transformar um ambiente profissional em um local mais acolhedor.




HR’s role evolved from dealing with payroll to overseeing people management and creating a positive work environment for the employees. One of the tools that can be used for that objective is applying the languages of appreciation. In other words:

In this context, the verb to allow means to make something possible to happen. The verb to allow comes before the verb to happen. The word that refers to the previous context, which is getting to know the employees a bit better. The verb to allow is being used in the following way: to allow someone or something + to + verb.

There is another verb that conveys the same idea as to allow in this sentence: to enable. It means to make something possible, or viable.

So it would be possible to say as follows:

The languages of appreciation allow that to happen.As linguagens da valorização pessoal permitem que isso aconteça.

The languages of appreciation enable that to happen.As linguagens da valorização pessoal possibilitam que isso aconteça.

This sentence is formed with the verb to enable and it maintains the same meaning and structure as the one previously mentioned. The verb to enable is also followed by an infinitive.

The verb to let can also be used in this sense, but to let will not be followed by an infinitive. Observe:

The languages of appreciation let that happen.As linguagens da valorização deixam isso acontecer.

Part 2.


148

The meaning of the sentence remains the same as the two previous ones. There is, however, a change in the structure: the verb happen is not in the infinitive. The sentence formation is: let someone or something + verb. The second verb remains in its base form.

In this case, to enable, to allow, and to let are synonymous. They all mean to make something possible.

Verbs can have different meanings according to the context. Observe this example:

In this sentence, the verb to allow means to authorize. Not only is the meaning of the verb different, but also the structure of the sentence. The verb to allow is followed by employees, those who receive the authorization. They are allowed to have smoking breaks, which is a noun that refers to pauses or quick stops for people to smoke before returning to work.

The construction is to allow someone something.

It would also be possible to say:

In this sentence, the verb to allow is followed by a verb in the infinitive: to take. The idea of the sentence remains the same.

The verb to allow meaning to authorize is more common in writing and it sounds formal. In a more informal language, the verb to let is preferable. Observe it in a sentence:

The company allows employees smoking breaks.A empresa autoriza os funcionários a fazer pausas para fumar.

The company allows employees to take smoking breaks.A empresa autoriza os funcionários a fazer pausas para fumar.

The company lets employees take smoking breaks.A empresa autoriza os funcionários a fazer pausas para fumar.

The verb to let maintains the sense of to allow, meaning authorization. It is followed by a verb in the base form: take.

It is common to use the verb to allow in passive structures when the context refers to authorization. For example:



149

This sentence is in the passive voice. The subject is employees, followed by the verb to be and the past participle allowed. Smoking breaks refers to what is being authorized. Even though the sentence is in the passive voice, it still carries the sense of an authorization.

It is also possible to form this sentence with a verb in the infinitive:

Employees are allowed to take smoking breaks.Funcionários são permitidos pausas para fumar.

This sentence carries the same meaning as the one seen previously. However, allowed is followed by the infinitive verb to take. The context remains the same.

However, in a different context, the meaning of the verb to allow can change. For example:

Employees are allowed smoking breaks.Funcionários são permitidos pausas para fumar.

The company allows employees one month of paid vacation a year.A empresa concede aos colaboradores um mês de férias pagas por ano.

In this sentence, the verb to allow means to off icially give someone something. In this case, the verb to allow is a synonym for the verb to grant. The sentence could be rewritten with it as follows:

The company grants employees one month of paid vacation a year.A empresa concede aos colaboradores um mês de férias pagas por ano.

Although the last two sentences have the same meaning, the verb to grant sounds more formal. In this context, to allow and to grant are synonymous, but the verb to let could not be used.

When the verb to let means to allow in the same sense as to enable or to authorize, it may have a causative function in the sentence, because someone lets someone else do something.

The same goes for the verb to get. It can also be used in a causative function. Observe:



150

By saying the mayor got his assistant, the meaning is that the mayor convinced his assistant to do something. In this case, to get his hands dirty for him. In this sentence, the second verb is in the infinitive form. This sentence is an example of the causative construction. Someone convinced someone else to do something.

The verb to have can also be used this way, observe:

The mayor wasn’t arrested because he got his assistant to get his hands dirty for him.

O prefeito não foi preso porque ele fez seu assistente sujar as suas mãos por ele.

Justin had his team finish the project before the deadline.Justin fez sua equipe terminar o projeto antes do prazo.

The verb to have is in the simple past, conjugated as had. It refers to Justin, a person that delegates an action to be done by another person. When the verb to have is used in a causative construction, the following verb must be in the base form, not the infinitive form.

In this case, the verb to have means the same as to get. Both establish a causative construction and convey the idea of convincing someone to do something. In a causative construction, to get and to have mean the same thing. However, the structure of the sentences will change.

The verb to make can also be used in a causative construction. For example:

Justin made his team work late this week.Justin fez sua equipe trabalhar até tarde esta semana.

Made is the verb to make in the simple past. In this sentence, it indicates that Justin forced his team to work late. This is a causative construction as well. In causative constructions, the verb to make means to force or to compel someone to do something. Note that the second verb in this case will be in the base form, such as work.

The verb to let can also be used in a causative construction. For example:



151

In this sentence, the idea is of permission or authorization. The verb to let is conjugated in the simple present as lets. This indicates that someone authorizes another person to do something. It is the same construction as seen previously; the second verb will come in the base form: leave.

So, the verbs to get, to have, to make, and to let can be used as causative verbs. Each of them will convey a different tone to the message. It is worth reinforcing that the verb to get in a causative construction must be followed by a verb in the infinitive form, whereas the other aforementioned verbs will be followed by the base form.

Verbs can have different meanings and also different uses. For instance, the verb lets is the verb to let conjugated in the third person singular in the simple present. However, it can also be found as such:

Let’s is spelled with an apostrophe because it is the contracted form of let us. It indicates that the speaker is included in the action. It does not mean authorization and it is not causative either.

Let’s is used to make an invitation or a suggestion. After let’s, we have the verb in the base form. In this case, the verb to imagine.

Here is another similar example:

The company lets employees leave early to learn English.A empresa deixa os colaboradores saírem mais cedo para aprender inglês.

Let’s imagine that a workmate has arrived from a vacation trip.Vamos imaginar que um colega de trabalho tenha chegado

de uma viagem de férias.

Let’s suppose a head of department buys a box of chocolates for each team member.

Vamos supor que um chefe de departamento compra uma caixa de bombons para cada membro da equipe.

This sentence begins with let’s, introducing an invitation. It is followed by a verb in the base form: suppose. This invitation is in the imperative, therefore the subject is omitted, and the f irst element of the sentence is the verb.

It is quite common to associate the imperative with orders. It is indeed used to give orders, but this verb form has other uses, such as making invitations or giving suggestions.



152

For example:

Here we have a suggestion or a piece of advice in the imperative: work hard. Despite the exclamation point, it is not an order.

Sometimes the context is not enough to grasp the tone of the sentence, especially in the imperative form. It is a direct and emphatic verb form, so the speaker may come off as rude or tactless, which is why there are ways of softening the tone of the sentence.

For example:

Pay attention to the gift’s meaning.Preste atenção ao signif icado do presente.

The sentence starts with the verb pay. The subject is omitted, making it clear this sentence is in the imperative. It implies a suggestion and not an order.

Observe this other example in the imperative form being used in the context of a coworker advising you on how to get a promotion:

If you want a promotion, work hard!Se você quer uma promoção, trabalhe duro!

Go to the doctor!Vá ao médico!

This sentence is in the imperative and it could sound like an order, especially because of the exclamation point. This may sound a little rude. However, by making some changes in the sentence the interpretation might change:

Go to the doctor, please.Vá ao médico, por favor.

This sentence does not sound like an order due to the word please. This word is used to make polite requests. Also, the exclamation point has been removed, and this changes the tone of the sentence.

It is also possible to use a causative construction in the imperative form to request someone to convince another person to do something. For example:



153

The verb to get is in the imperative and in a causative function. Checked out is the past participle of the phrasal verb to check out, which here means to examine. So, someone will convince someone else to do something.

Will you is a tag question frequently used with the imperative form. Its role is to attenuate the imperative.

Observe another example with it:

Get him checked out by the doctor, will you?Faça ele ser examinado pelo médico, pode ser?

Have the team hand in the project on time, will you?Faça a equipe entregar o projeto a tempo, pode ser?

This sentence is in the imperative form. As you can see, the tag question will you smoothens the tone of the sentence. In this case, it sounds like a request to make somebody else do something. The phrasal verb to hand in means to deliver something to an authority or responsible person.

Shall we is another tag question that can be used with the imperative. Observe:

Let’s schedule the meeting for tomorrow morning, shall we?Vamos marcar a reunião para amanhã de manhã, pode ser?

As previously mentioned, let’s is the contraction of let us, thus it includes the speaker in the sentence. That is why the tag question must also include the speaker: shall we.

This kind of communication is not only used in work environments, but we have to be careful when using it. The tone is extremely important, and there are ways to avoid the imperative when making an invitation or a suggestion in case we wish to sound more polite.

For instance:

What if we schedule the meeting for tomorrow morning?E se nós marcarmos a reunião para amanhã de manhã?



What if is used to make a suggestion or an invitation. It is followed by an affirmative structure, even though it is a question.

There is another way of making a suggestion, which is:

The meaning of the sentence is the same as the one previously seen. Note that what about is followed by a verb in the -ing form.

How about sending a gift to Rose? It’s her birthday today.Que tal mandar um presente para a Rose? É o aniversário dela hoje.

In this sentence, how about is followed by a verb in the -ing form, but it could also be followed by a noun. How about is used to make a suggestion or an invitation.

It is also possible to use what about:

What about sending a gift to Rose? It’s her birthday today.Que tal mandar um presente para a Rose? É o aniversário dela hoje.

Now you know that some verbs vary their meaning depending on the context. You also learned the causative construction and how to make

invitations and give suggestions.




1. birthday2. meeting3. tomorrow4. to schedule5. to send6. to hand in

1. lets2. Let’s3. What if4. Have5. How/What about6. Get

Activity A – AnswersActivity B – Answers7. on time8. to be checked out9. meaning10. to suppose11. workmate12. to learn



( 1 ) aniversário

( 2 ) reunião

( 3 ) amanhã

( 4 ) marcar

( 5 ) mandar

( 6 ) entregar

( 7 ) a tempo

( 8 ) ser examinado

( 9 ) signif icado

( 10 ) supor

( 11 ) colega de trabalho

( 12 ) aprender

( ) tomorrow

( ) to hand in

( ) birthday

( ) to be checked out

( ) to learn

( ) meaning

( ) workmate

( ) to schedule

( ) to suppose

( ) to send

( ) on time

( ) meeting

1. The company employees leave early to learn English. A empresa deixa os colaboradores saírem mais cedo para aprender inglês.

2. imagine that a workmate has arrived from a vacation trip. Vamos imaginar que um colega de trabalho tenha chegado de uma viagem de férias.

3. we schedule the meeting for tomorrow morning? E se nós marcarmos a reunião para amanhã de manhã?

4. the team hand in the project on time, will you? Faça a equipe entregar o projeto a tempo, pode ser?

5. scheduling the meeting for tomorrow morning? Que tal marcarmos a reunião para amanhã de manhã?

6. him checked out by the doctor, will you? Faça ele ser examinado pelo médico, pode ser?

Part 3.

Activities



You have seen the imperative form and its uses in the vocabulary part of this chapter. Now, let’s analyze its structure.

In this verb form, the subject will always be the second person you, which can be either singular or plural. In general, the subject will be omitted in the sentence. That is why sentences in the imperative start with the verb, both in aff irmative and negative forms. There is no interrogative form in the imperative.

In general, in the aff irmative form, the verb will be the f irst element of the sentence, in its base form, followed by the complement, if necessary. Observe the following sentence in the affirmative form of the imperative:

The first element of the sentence will be the main verb in its base form: go. It is followed by the complement. Note that the subject is omitted.


IMPERATIVEAffirmative form

main verb in the base form + complementverbo principal na forma base + complemento

Go to the doctor, please!Vá ao médico, por favor!

IMPERATIVEAffirmative form

Schedule the meeting for this week.Marque a reunião para esta semana.

Part 4.


157

In the previous sentence, the verb to schedule is in its base form and the rest of the sentence is the complement. Once more, the subject is omitted.

These sentences can be understood as orders, suggestions, or requests. It will depend on the context.

The negative form of the imperative will be built with the help of the auxiliary verb do and the particle not. Do not, or its contracted form don’t, will come before the main verb in its base form. Observe:

The f irst element of the sentence is the contracted form of do not: don’t. After that, we have the main verb in its base form, which is schedule. Lastly, the complement. Once again, the subject is omitted.

The imperative in the negative form may be interpreted as an order that expresses a prohibition.

Note that it is possible to mention the subject in the affirmative form if you wish to add a tone of anger to the sentence. And it will be placed before the main verb.

For example:

IMPERATIVENegative form

auxiliary verb do + not + main verb in the base form + complementverbo auxiliar do + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

Don’t schedule the meeting for this week.Não marque a reunião para essa semana.

IMPERATIVE

Affirmative form – explicit subject to connote angerForma afirmativa – sujeito explícito para conotar raiva

subject (2nd person) + main verb in the base form + complementsujeito (2a pessoa) + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

You pay attention to the gift’s meaning.Você preste atenção no signif icado do presente.



158

By adding the subject pronoun you before the main verb, the general tone of the sentence is one of anger. In this case, the structure is: the subject in the second person, you, followed by the main verb in the base form, pay, and then the complement.

The subject can also be used for emphasis in the negative form. For example:

In this case, the f irst element of the sentence is the auxiliary verb don’t, followed by the subject pronoun you, here representing the second person. Then we have the main verb miss, and the complement this meeting.

Since the subject of the imperative is always the second person, singular or plural, the correct subject pronoun to use with it – in case we wish to add a tone of anger or emphasis – will be you.

Subject pronouns are commonly used to substitute a noun that functions as the subject in a sentence. Besides the subject pronouns, there are also object pronouns. They substitute a noun that has the function of object of the sentence. It means they receive the action expressed by the verb.

Observe this example with subject pronouns and object pronouns:

IMPERATIVE

Negative form – explicit subject for emphasisForma negativa – sujeito explícito para ênfase

auxiliary verb do + not (don’t) + subject (2nd person) + main verb in the base form + complement

verbo auxiliar do + not (don’t) + sujeito (2a pessoa) + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

Don’t you miss this meeting.Você não perca essa reunião.

SUBJECT PRONOUNS X OBJECT PRONOUNS

We give gifts to our friends to show them how much we appreciate them.Nós presenteamos nossos amigos para demonstrar o quanto os valorizamos.

We is a subject pronoun that represents the f irst person plural. It is the subject of the sentence and performs the action. Our friends is the object of the sentence. It receives the action of the verb. In this sentence, the verb to give has two objects: gifts and to our friends. They are both in the plural and represent the third person plural. Them is an object pronoun that refers to our friends, but instead of repeating it, the object pronoun them is being used.



159

OBJECT PRONOUNS

Singular1st person me me / mim2nd person you te / você3rd person (people) him / her ele / ela / o / a3rd person (except people) it ele / ela / o / a

Plural1st person us nos / nós2nd person you vocês3rd person them eles / elas / os / as

The object of the sentence will not always appear as an object pronoun. For example:

The subject pronoun we is used twice in this sentence: once before the verb to give and then before the verb to appreciate. The object pronoun them, which represents to third person plural, appears twice: once after the verb to show and once after the verb to appreciate. In general, object pronouns come after the verb, whereas subject pronouns come before the verb.

There is a corresponding object pronoun to each person of the speech. Observe:

OBJECT OF THE SENTENCE

Tony let Juliana hand in the report late.Tony deixou Juliana entregar o relatório atrasado.

The subject of the sentence is Tony, which could be replaced by the subject pronoun he. It is the one who does the action described by the verb to let. Juliana receives the action, so it is the object. It is a feminine proper name that corresponds to the third person singular, hence it can be replaced by the object pronoun her. The verb let implies a causative construction.

It would be possible to write the same sentence just with pronouns:

SUBJECT PRONOUNS X OBJECT PRONOUNS

He let her hand in the report late.Ele a deixou entregar o relatório atrasado.



160

This sentence is in the aff irmative form of the imperative. The subject, you, is explicit, thus bringing a tone of anger to it. You represents the person that does the action expressed by the verb to have. Note that this verb has a causative function in this sentence, since it is referring to another person that will perform another action. This other person is Paul, and it works as the object of the verb to have. Paul is a masculine proper noun that corresponds to the third person singular, so it would be possible to replace Paul with the object pronoun him. Note that the action Paul is supposed to perform is to go to the meeting.

The previous example could be rewritten as:

The subject pronoun he is the subject, it corresponds to Tony. The object pronoun her comes after the verb, playing the role of an object.

This sentence establishes a causative construction in the simple present. However, causative constructions also exist in the imperative. For example:

IMPERATIVE – CAUSATIVE CONSTRUCTION

You have Paul go to the meeting.Faça Paul ir à reunião.


You have him go to the meeting.Faça ele ir à reunião.

The sentence remains in the imperative with an added tone of anger due to the use of the subject pronoun you. The sentence still has a causative construction, but in this example, have is the causative verb. The object, Paul, was replaced by the corresponding object pronoun – him.

It is possible to write a sentence using a causative structure in the imperative, without an explicit subject. Observe:


Passive voiceVoz passiva

Get him checked out by a doctor, will you?Faça ele ser examinado por um médico, pode ser?



161

The subject of this sentence is omitted. The main verb is get, which carries the causative function of convincing someone to be checked out by a doctor. The person that will be checked out is indicated by the object pronoun him.

Checked out is the past participle of the phrasal verb to check out. In this sentence, it is being used in a passive construction. By the doctor is the agent of the passive. In this sentence, the verb to be is implicit.

However, it would be possible to use it. Take a look:

The verb to be would be placed after the object pronoun. However, it is generally implicit in this type of sentence. The verb to get has a causative function in the sentence, so the next verb will be in the infinitive form, marked by the particle to: to be.

Observe another example of a sentence in the passive voice with a causative construction:



Get him to be checked out by a doctor, will you?Faça ele ser examinado por um médico, pode ser?



Get the employees paid.Faça os funcionários serem pagos.

The verb to get is followed by the object of the sentence, which is the employees. It would be possible to replace it with the object pronoun them. Paid is the past participle of the verb to pay. This sentence follows a passive structure formation: verb to get + object + past participle. So, this sentence obeys a passive structure formation. It also implies a causative function of the verb to get.

In the passive voice, the focus is on who receives the action of the sentence. In general, sentences in the passive voice are formed with the verb to be as an auxiliary verb. The main verb will be in the past participle.



162

PASSIVE VOICE

The gift isn’t determined by a specific special date.O presente não é determinado por uma data especial específ ica.

For example:

The gift is the subject of the sentence. It is followed by the auxiliary verb to be in the negative form, isn’t, and then we have determined, the past participle of the main verb to determine. A specif ic special date is the agent of the passive. Notice that the preposition by introduces it.

In the active voice, the sentence would be:

ACTIVE VOICE

A specific special date doesn’t determine the gift.Uma data especial específ ica não determina o presente.

The subject of this sentence is a specific special date, which was the passive agent in the passive voice. The main verb is to determine, conjugated in the negative form of the simple present, hence the use of the auxiliary doesn’t. The gift is the object, and could be replaced with the object pronoun it.

Observe another example in the passive voice:

PASSIVE VOICE

Twenty employees were fired by the company.Vinte funcionários foram demitidos pela empresa.

Observe the structure of the passive voice: the subject, twenty employees, is followed by the auxiliary verb to be conjugated in the simple past as were, and then the main verb in the past participle: fired. The agent of the passive is by the company.

In this sentence, to be is the auxiliary verb. However, the verb to get can also be used as an auxiliary verb in the passive voice. For example:



163

This sentence is in the passive voice. The verb got establishes a causative function with the past participle repaired. The object of the sentence is computer, and the agent of the passive is by the IT department. This sentence means that the IT department f ixed Paul’s computer for him. They provided a service.

The verb to have can also be used with this construction:

PASSIVE VOICE

Twenty employees got fired by the company.Vinte funcionários foram demitidos pela empresa.

The verb to get was conjugated as got because the context refers to a past situation. It is the auxiliary verb in this sentence, followed by the past participle fired. This sentence expresses the same idea as the previous one, but it is formed with the verb to get, which is more common in informal contexts.

This is also commonly used when talking about service. For example:

PASSIVE VOICECausative construction

Paul got his computer repaired by the IT department.Paul teve seu computador consertado pelo departamento de TI.


Mike had the employees trained.Mike teve os funcionários treinados.

Had is the verb to have in the simple past. It conveys the idea of getting something done by someone else. Trained is the past participle of the verb to train. This sentence means that Mike delegated the job of training the employees to another person. So, they were trained by someone else.

Observe yet another example:



164


Julia got her hair cut by a hairdresser.Julia teve seu cabelo cortado por um cabeleireiro.

It is very clear in this sentence that Julia did not cut her hair herself. Her hairdresser is the agent of the passive and the one who cut her hair. In this situation, the agent of the passive is rarely mentioned because it is implicit in the context. The professional that provides the service of cutting hair is the hairdresser. Therefore, it is more common to say:


Julia got her hair cut.Julia cortou o cabelo.

Causative verbs can also be used in the imperative, followed by a passive construction, to give an order for someone to perform a task. For instance:

IMPERATIVE – CAUSATIVE CONSTRUCTIONPassive voice

Get my car washed.Leve meu carro para lavar.

In this sentence, get is a causative verb. My car is the object of the sentence, which corresponds to the object pronoun it, and washed is the past participle of the verb to wash.

It is also possible to use the verb to have in this manner:



165

In this chapter, you learned the difference between object pronouns and subject pronouns. You also learned how to use the causative verbs, the imperative, and the passive voice. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can refer to

the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Imperative Page 210Object Pronouns Page 235Passive Voice Page 239Subject Pronouns Page 294


Have my car washed.Leve meu carro para lavar.

The structure and the meaning of this sentence is the same as in the previous one. The subject is omitted, followed by have, which here is also a causative verb.

The verb to make can also be used in this structure, but it conveys a different tone. Observe:


Make him write the report!Faça ele escrever o relatório!

In this sentence, the verb to make conveys the idea of forcing or obligating someone to do something. It refers to the action of writing the report. Him is an object pronoun that refers to the 3rd person singular masculine. So, someone is ordered to force another person to write the report.



166

Part 5.

Activities

Subject Pronoun

I

you

he

she

it

we

you

they

Object Pronoun

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

A. Complete the chart with the correct object pronouns:


1. the meeting for this week.

Não marque a reunião para esta semana.

2. Twenty employees by the company.

Vinte funcionários foram demitidos pela empresa.

3. Julia by a hairdresser.

Julia teve seu cabelo cortado por um cabeleireiro.

4. The gift by a specific special date.

O presente não é determinado por uma data especial específ ica.



1. Do not / Don’t schedule2. were / got fired3. got / had her hair cut4. is not / isn’t determined5. had6. got / had his computer repaired / fixed

1. me2. you3. him4. her5. it6. us7. you8. them


5. Mike the employees trained.

Mike teve os funcionários treinados.

6. Paul by the IT department.

Paul teve seu computador consertado pelo departamento de TI.


Physical TouchPhysical Touch

7

Chapter 7



In our previous episodes, we saw that, throughout the years, the personnel department has grown within big companies, going from taking care of just hiring and f iring to taking on a more important task: people management.

Personality types became a crucial tool in this process because they help to better understand the personalities of the employees. This leads to adapting communication and avoiding misunderstandings as well as a heavy atmosphere in the team.

We have also seen the potential that languages of appreciation have to transform the work environment into a more welcoming place. After all, we often spend more time at work than with our friends and family. Having a light work environment helps us to have a better quality of life. And for some people, this means receiving a pat on the back from time to time.

That’s right! Physical touch is the f ifth language of appreciation.

Some people feel valued and stimulated when they physically interact with others. The professional that f its this profile would easily trade a handshake for a hug. They are people who like to socialize, to be with others, and who see physical interactions as a way to relieve day-to-day stress and to bond with other people. When we talk about physical touch, it has even greater importance since some people may not like this type of interaction and feel somewhat invaded.

You know that bear hug, really tight and long? Some people see it as a caring and affectionate gesture, while others may f ind it extremely uncomfortable. Since this is something subjective, before going around hugging the whole team, it’s fundamental to observe if a colleague

PHYSICAL TOUCH

In this chapter, you will learn how to introduce reason and consequence and how to talk about probability. You will also learn some phrasal verbs, other words to increase your vocabulary and important grammar topics.

Now, look at the script of Physical Touch.

Part 1.


170

likes this type of behavior or not. It’s necessary to know the boundaries of physical touch and not to cross them.

Use with moderation.

Now that you know the f ive languages of appreciation, it’s important to note that they do not exist separately. All these languages may affect us in a certain way, but only one of them will stand out over the others.

Some people prefer to receive gifts instead of words of aff irmation. But this does not reduce their importance. It just means that, for this person, gifts are more effective.

Do you remember when we said that people management is a dynamic and interactive process? Very well. To use the languages of appreciation in the right way, it’s necessary to adapt communication, taking into account each one’s type of personality.

For example, a colleague has a “Dominance” type of personality and likes to receive gifts. They may prefer to get them when they achieve a personal or professional goal. On the other hand, a colleague with the “Steadiness” type of personality who likes physical touch may feel valued by having physical contact on an ordinary workday instead of only when something special happens. As you can see, with the job market evolution, strategic people management started to have a fundamental role for companies.

It’s through people management that companies can work with inclusive practices and bring appreciation to all employees. This is the difference between recognition and appreciation. While an attitude of recognition rewards the best, appreciation rewards everyone.

And that’s fundamental to the construction of a healthy work environment in the new world. That’s why the personal and professional satisfaction of employees has increasingly become more important in business strategic planning.

CONTATO FÍSICO

Nos nossos últimos episódios, vimos que ao longo dos anos, o departamento pessoal cresceu dentro das grandes empresas, deixando de cuidar apenas das contratações e demissões para assumir uma importante tarefa: a gestão de pessoas.



171

Os perfis comportamentais se tornaram uma ferramenta crucial neste processo, pois ajudam a entender melhor a personalidade dos colaboradores. Isso permite uma adaptação da comunicação, evitando mal-entendidos, bem como um clima pesado na equipe.

Nós também vimos o potencial que as linguagens da valorização pessoal têm de transformar o ambiente de trabalho num lugar mais acolhedor. Afinal de contas, muitas vezes passamos mais tempo no trabalho do que com nossos amigos e família. Um ambiente de trabalho leve nos ajuda a ter uma qualidade de vida melhor. E para algumas pessoas, isso pode signif icar receber um tapinha nas costas de vez em quando.

Isso mesmo! O contato físico é a quinta linguagem da valorização pessoal.

Algumas pessoas se sentem valorizadas e estimuladas quando interagem fisicamente com as outras. Esse perf il de profissional trocaria facilmente um aperto de mãos por um abraço. São pessoas que gostam de socializar, de estar juntas umas das outras, e que veem na interação f ísica uma maneira de aliviar a tensão do dia a dia e formar laços. Quando falamos de contato f ísico, isso tem uma importância ainda maior pelo fato de que algumas pessoas podem não gostar desse tipo de interação e se sentirem invadidas de certo modo.

Sabe aquele abraço de urso, bem apertado e demorado? Algumas pessoas podem vê-lo como um gesto carinhoso e afetuoso, enquanto outras podem achá-lo extremamente desconfortável. Como isso é subjetivo, antes de sair abraçando toda a equipe, é fundamental observar se um colega gosta desse tipo de comportamento, ou não. É preciso conhecer os limites do contato f ísico e não ultrapassá-los.

Use com moderação.

Agora que você já conhece as cinco linguagens da valorização pessoal, é importante perceber que elas não existem separadamente. Todas essas linguagens podem nos afetar de certo modo, mas apenas uma delas vai se destacar sobre as demais.

Tem gente que prefere receber presentes em vez de palavras afirmativas. Mas isso não diminui a importância das palavras de afirmação. Isso apenas diz que, para essa pessoa, presentes são mais eficazes.



172

Lembra-se de quando falamos que a gestão de pessoas é um processo dinâmico e interativo? Pois bem. Para usar as linguagens da valorização pessoal do jeito certo, é preciso adaptar a comunicação, levando em conta o perf il comportamental de cada um.

Por exemplo, um colega tem o perf il “Dominante” e gosta de receber presentes. Ele pode preferir recebê-los quando conquista alguma meta pessoal ou profissional. Por outro lado, um colega de perf il “Estável”, que gosta de contato f ísico, pode se sentir valorizado com contato f ísico em um dia de trabalho qualquer, em vez de apenas quando algo especial acontece. Como você pode ver, com a evolução do mercado de trabalho, a gestão estratégica de pessoas passou a ter um papel fundamental para as empresas.

É por meio da gestão de pessoas que as empresas podem trabalhar com práticas inclusivas e trazer a valorização a todos os colaboradores. Essa é a diferença entre reconhecimento e valorização: enquanto uma atitude de reconhecimento premia os melhores, a valorização premia a todos.

E isso é primordial para a construção de um ambiente de trabalho saudável no novo mundo. Por isso, a satisfação pessoal e profissional dos colaboradores tem cada vez mais importância no planejamento estratégico das empresas.




In this chapter, you will learn about the last language of appreciation: physical touch.

There are appropriate ways of using physical touch in the workplace, such as high-fiving someone.

A high five is the action of hitting another person’s hand with your own above your heads. It is an informal gesture usually made to express happiness or celebrate something. In a light, informal work environment it is appropriate to high f ive colleagues.

A high f ive is a type of physical touch, but there are others. For instance:

Bear hug is an expression that means giving or receiving a very tight and strong hug, which is another type of physical touch. The adjective tight means f ixed f irmly in place. The adjective long references something that continues for a large amount of time.

A high five and a bear hug are two types of physical touches that may be used in the work environment, but there are still others, such as:

You know that bear hug, really tight and long?Sabe aquele abraço de urso, bem apertado e demorado?

PHYSICAL TOUCH

a hugum abraço

a pat on the backum tapinha nas costas

a handshakeum aperto de mãos

a kissum beijo

Part 2.


174

A kiss may be one of the least appropriate gestures in the workplace unless it is a very informal, friendly environment.

There are specif ic verbs that can be used to talk about physical touch:

We can either say to give someone a hug or to hug someone. The word hug can be used as a noun or a verb. It is also correct to say give someone a pat on the back or pat someone’s back. So, the word pat can work as a noun or a verb too. The word kiss also functions as a verb or a noun. It is correct to say kiss someone or give someone a kiss.

Different cultures deal differently with physical touches. So, it is necessary to be very attentive to cultural aspects when it comes to this language of appreciation. Aside from that, not everyone likes physical contact. In other words:

VERBS ABOUT PHYSICAL TOUCH

to give a hugdar um abraço

to hugabraçar

to give someone a pat on the back / to pat someone’s backdar um tapinha nas costas de alguém

to shake handsdar um aperto de mãos

to kiss someonebeijar alguém

to give someone a kissdar um beijo em alguém

to wave helloacenar para dizer oi

to wave goodbyeacenar para dizer adeus

Some people see it as a caring and affectionate gesture, while others may find it extremely uncomfortable.

Algumas pessoas podem vê-lo como um gesto carinhoso e afetuoso, enquanto outras podem achá-lo extremamente desconfortável.



175

In the previous sentence, uncomfortable is an adjective formed by the prefix un-. It is the opposite of comfortable. Notice that these adjectives are both formed with the suff ix -able. Caring is also an adjective, it ends in -ing, another kind of suff ix. Affectionate is an adjective that characterizes a person or a gesture that shows feelings of love or affection. Note that it is formed with the suff ix -ate.

It is also possible to use the verb to think as a synonym for to find in this context. Observe an example:

In this sentence, awkward is a synonym of embarrassing, which refers to something that causes shyness or shame. Note that, in this context, the verb to find means to locate or discover something you had been looking for.

Identifying the type of stimulus to which each person reacts best is important, hence knowing the personality type of each employee makes a difference. The DiSC theory is a tool for that. In other words:

Mary thinks that hugging coworkers is very inappropriate and awkward.Mary pensa que abraçar colegas de trabalho é muito inapropriado e desconfortável.

In the previous sentence, the verb to think has the same meaning as the verb to find. Both mean having an opinion on something. The verb to feel could also be used in this sentence.

Now, observe the adjectives in the last example. The adjective inappropriate is a synonym for improper. Its opposite is appropriate or proper, respectively. Both mean correct or suitable in a specif ic situation. Awkward means weird or uncomfortable.

However, the meaning of this word can vary according to the context:

I needed to pay for dinner, but I didn’t find my wallet. It was so awkward.Eu precisava pagar pelo jantar, mas eu não encontrei minha carteira.

Foi tão constrangedor.

Personality types became a crucial tool in this process because they help to better understand the personalities of the employees.Os perfis comportamentais se tornaram uma ferramenta crucial

neste processo, pois ajudam a entender melhor a personalidade dos colaboradores.



176

Due to is a formal way of introducing motive. It is similar to because of and also followed by a noun instead of a complete sentence. Due to establishes a relation of cause and consequence. In more informal contexts, because of tends to be more used than due to.

There are yet other words used to introduce an entire sentence explaining the reason for something. For instance:

As you can see in the example, because is a word used to introduce a reason or an explanation, and it is followed by a complete sentence.

Because of can also be used to introduce reason, but in this case, it will not be followed by a complete sentence. Observe:

Traffic is a noun, and not an entire sentence, hence the use of because of.

There is another way of introducing motive just like that, such as:

In the sentence above, the word since introduces the reason why talking about physical touch is so important. Note that the reason is stated in a complete sentence. In this case, since and because are synonyms and interchangeable.

In other contexts, the word since has another meaning. Observe:

Robert was late for the meeting because of the traffic.Robert se atrasou para a reunião por causa do trânsito.

Due to unforeseen technical difficulties, the webinar will not take place.Devido a dif iculdades técnicas imprevistas, o webinário não vai ocorrer.

When we talk about physical touch, it has even greater importance, since some people may not like this type of interaction.

Quando falamos de contato físico, isso tem uma importância ainda maior pelo fato de que algumas pessoas podem não gostar desse tipo de interação.

Teddy has worked in the same company since 1984.Teddy trabalha na mesma empresa desde 1984.



177

In this sentence, since means from a point in the past up to the present. So, in this context, since marks a starting date for an action that continues through time until the present. It is not synonymous with because.

Words can change meaning according to the context. The following word is an example of that: for. In some sentences, it can be used to indicate to whom something is intended, but it can also be used to introduce a reason. For example:

Please do not be late, for dinner starts at 7 o’clock.Por favor, não se atrase, porque o jantar começa às 7 horas.

In this sentence, for introduces a reason and it can be a synonym of because and since. For has a more formal tone. It is also similar to the expression given the fact that. Note that for is followed by a complete sentence.

If the structure of the sentence were different, the meaning of for would also change. Observe:

Please do not be late for dinner. It starts at 7 o’clock.Por favor, não se atrase para o jantar. Ele começa às 7 horas.

In this case, for is a dependent preposition that follows the adjective late. It does not introduce a reason.

The word as can also be used to introduce a reason. Observe:

To congratulate Mark, Shirley patted him on the back, as he is a person who likes physical touch.

Para parabenizar Mark, Shirley deu um tapinha nas costas dele, porque ele é uma pessoa que gosta de contato f ísico.

In this sentence, the word as is a synonym of because. In this context, it is used to present the reason why Shirley patted Mark on the back. It is followed by a complete sentence.

Here, pat is being used as a verb, to pat, and not as a noun. It has -ed at the end because it is a regular verb conjugated in the simple past.

It is important to understand how each type of personality reacts to each type of language of appreciation. However, these languages are not dissociated one from the other, just like no one has just a single trait of the DiSC personality. Putting it differently:



178

The phrasal verb to stand up means to get up on your feet. This phrasal verb is formed by the verb to stand and the particle up.

The verb to stand can be used to form interesting phrasal verbs and expressions. Here is another example:

All these languages may affect us in a certain way, but only one of them will stand out over the others.

Todas essas linguagens podem nos afetar de certo modo, mas apenas uma delas vai se destacar sobre as demais.

Observe that the modal verb may conveys the idea of probability, whereas the modal verb will indicates that something has a great chance of happening, so it implies certainty in the future.

The phrasal verb to stand out means to be easily seen or noticed, usually among others. This phrasal verb is formed by the verb to stand and the particle out. By changing the particle of the phrasal verb, its meaning changes.

For instance:

At a business dinner, it’s common to stand up when someone important arrives.

Durante um jantar de negócios, é comum se levantar quando alguém importante chega.

The company stands up for animal rights.A empresa defende os direitos dos animais.

To stand up for something means to support something, in the sense of arguing in the defense of a cause or on behalf of an idea or a person.

However, by not using for, the meaning will change. Observe:

Mary stood Thomas up last night. He was furious.Mary deu um bolo em Thomas ontem à noite. Ele estava furioso.

To stand someone up means to not show up at a previously scheduled meeting with somebody, without even telling them you will not make it.



Now you know how to introduce reasons and consequences, and how to use may to talk about probability. You have also learned some phrasal verbs.

There is another phrasal verb formed with the verb to stand, but with a different particle. Observe this next example:

To stand down means to leave a position, in this case, an entire election dispute. A synonym in this context would be to withdraw from the elections.

The expression that’s the reason why is a way to introduce a consequence of something said previously. There is another way of introducing a consequence for something that happened before. Observe:

Megan stood in for Jimmy, since he went on vacation.A Megan substituiu o Jimmy porque ele saiu de férias.

In this sentence, the verb to stand is conjugated in the simple past as stood. The phrasal verb to stand in for someone means to substitute or replace someone temporarily.

This phrasal verb is frequently used in the workplace, but it is also common in the theater. A stand-in actor or actress replaces the star when they cannot perform.

There are other phrasal verbs formed with to stand:

The mayor wanted to give a chance to a younger candidate, that’s the reason why he stood down from the election.

O prefeito queria dar uma chance a um candidato mais jovem, é por isso que ele se retirou da eleição.

Appreciation is fundamental to the construction of a healthy work environment in the new world. That’s why the personal and professional satisfaction of employees has

become important.Valorização é primordial para a construção de um ambiente de trabalho saudável no novo

mundo. Por isso, a satisfação pessoal e profissional dos colaboradores se tornou importante.

That’s why refers to what was said in the previous sentence, hence it introduces the consequence of something that was previously said. This structure emphasizes what occurs afterward as a result.




1. a

hug

2. a

pat

on

the

back

3. a

han

dsha

ke4.

a k

iss

5. to

giv

e a

hug

6. to

hug

1. to

sta

nd u

p2.

sta

nds

up fo

r3.

sta

nd o

ut4.

sto

od /

up5.

sto

od d

own

6. s

tood

in fo

r

Act

ivity

A –

Ans

wer

sA

ctiv

ity B

– A

nsw

ers

7. to

pat

som

eone

’s ba

ck8.

to s

hake

han

ds9.

to k

iss

som

eone

10. t

o gi

ve s

omeo

ne a

kis

s11

. to

wav

e he

llo12

. to

wav

e go

odby

e



( 1 ) um abraço

( 2 ) um tapinha nas costas

( 3 ) um aperto de mãos

( 4 ) um beijo

( 5 ) dar um abraço

( 6 ) abraçar

( 7 ) dar um tapinha nas costas de alguém

( 8 ) dar um aperto de mãos

( 9 ) beijar alguém

( 10 ) dar um beijo em alguém

( 11 ) acenar para dizer oi

( 12 ) acenar para dizer adeus

( ) a kiss

( ) to pat someone’s back

( ) to give a hug

( ) to shake hands

( ) a handshake

( ) to wave hello

( ) to kiss someone

( ) to wave goodbye

( ) to give someone a kiss

( ) a hug

( ) to hug

( ) a pat on the back

1. At a business dinner, it’s common when someone important arrives. Durante um jantar de negócios, é comum se levantar quando alguém importante chega.

2. The company animal rights. A empresa defende os direitos dos animais.

3. All these languages may affect us in a certain way, but only one of them will over the others. Todas essas linguagens podem nos afetar de certo modo, mas apenas uma delas vai se destacar sobre as demais.

4. Mary Thomas last night. He was furious. Mary deu um bolo em Thomas ontem à noite. Ele estava furioso.

5. The mayor wanted to give a chance to a younger candidate, that’s the reason why he from the election. O prefeito queria dar uma chance a um candidato mais jovem, é por isso que ele se retirou da eleição.

6. Megan Jimmy, since he went on vacation. A Megan substituiu o Jimmy porque ele saiu de férias.

Part 3.

Activities



Throughout the previous chapters you saw that there are several ways of forming sentences. Many will follow the same structure, even though we may use different verb forms.

For instance, the simple present and the simple past follow the same basic sentence structure in the affirmative form. So, the structure will be the same for the verb to be and for the other verbs, even though they follow different rules of conjugation.

First of all, observe this sentence with the verb to be in the simple present:

Physical touch is the subject of the sentence, followed by the main verb – to be conjugated as is – according to the third person singular in the simple present. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

The complete structure of this sentence is subject + main verb + complement, but note that the complement will not always be necessary. It depends on the verb.

In the simple past the structure will be the same. Observe:

AFFIRMATIVE FORMSimple Present – verb to be


Physical touch is the fifth language of appreciation.Contato f ísico é a quinta linguagem da valorização pessoal.

AFFIRMATIVE FORMSimple Past – verb to be


The main function of the personnel department was to organize payroll.A função principal do departamento pessoal era organizar

a folha de pagamento.

Part 4.


182

The subject is some people and it comes before the main verb, which is prefer. To prefer is a regular verb. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

In the simple present, both the regular and irregular verbs remain in the base form when they are conjugated in the affirmative form. Except for the third person singular. In this case, the general rule is to add -S to the end of the verb’s base form.

In the simple past, the structure of the aff irmative form will also be subject + main verb + complement, however there will be changes in the conjugation of the verb. Observe:

The subject comes at the beginning of the sentence: the main function of the personnel department. The verb to be is conjugated in the simple past as was, according to the third person singular. The rest of the sentence is the complement. As mentioned previously, the structure of the sentence is subject + main verb + complement. Therefore, observe that the structure remains the same. The only change is the verb conjugation.

This structure of the affirmative form, both in the simple present and in the simple past, will also be applied to verbs other than to be, whether they are regular or irregular verbs.

For example:

AFFIRMATIVE FORMSimple Present – other verbs


Some people prefer to get presents.Algumas pessoas preferem ganhar presentes.

AFFIRMATIVE FORMSimple Past – other verbs


Last Christmas, we played board games all night.No Natal passado, nós jogamos jogos de tabuleiro a noite toda.



183

The subject, we, comes before the main verb: played. The complement is board games all night. The verb to play is a regular verb conjugated in the simple past, thus we must add -ed to its base form. That is the general rule of conjugation for regular verbs in the simple past.

The irregular verbs follow the structure of the simple past, but the conjugation is not formed with -ed. It varies from case to case, and there is no general rule.

The imperative also follows this structure, but it is important to observe one difference: the subject will be omitted. Take a look:

The main verb, use, is the f irst element of the sentence, because the subject is omitted. In the imperative, the subject is always the person to whom we are talking, that is, the second person singular or plural.

The imperative, the simple past, and the simple present do not make use of an auxiliary verb in the aff irmative form.

However, some verb forms do need an auxiliary verb in the aff irmative form, such as the present perfect and the past perfect. In these cases, the structure of the affirmative form will be different than the one seen so far. Observe:

AFFIRMATIVE FORMImperative

main verb + complementverbo principal + complemento

Use with moderation.Use com moderação.

AFFIRMATIVE FORMPresent Perfect & Past Perfect

subject + auxiliary verb + main verb + complementsujeito + verbo auxiliar + verbo principal + complemento

Compared to the previous affirmative sentence structure, this one will include an auxiliary verb that will be placed between the subject and the main verb. It is the same structure for the present perfect and the past perfect. Both of them use the auxiliary verb to have. The difference is that the auxiliary verb will be conjugated differently.



184

The personnel department is the subject. It is equivalent to the third person singular and that is why the auxiliary verb is conjugated as has. It is followed by the main verb in the past participle: grown. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

In the case of the present perfect, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated in the present as has when the subject represents the third person singular, and as have for all other subjects.

In the past perfect, however, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated as had. As for the main verb, it will also be in the past participle.

Observe an example of a sentence in the past perfect:

Observe the specif ic structure of the present perfect followed by an example:


subject + auxiliary verb have/has + main verb in the past participle + complementsujeito + verbo auxiliar have/has + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

The personnel department has grown within big companies.O departamento pessoal cresceu dentro das grandes empresas.


subject + auxiliary verb had + main verb in the past participle + complementsujeito + verbo auxiliar had + verbo principal no particípio passado + complemento

Sally had prepared her presentation. Then, she went to the meeting.Sally tinha preparado a apresentação dela. Então, ela foi para a reunião.

The subject of the sentence in the past perfect is Sally, followed by the auxiliary verb to have conjugated in the past: had. Then we have the main verb in the past participle: prepared. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

The subject of the sentence in the simple past is she. It comes before the main verb, went, which is the conjugation of the irregular verb to go followed by the complement. This sentence indicates that one action happened before another one in the past. This previous action is indicated in the past perfect: had prepared.



185

As you can see, the verb to have can be used as an auxiliary verb. And so can modal verbs.

These auxiliary verbs are used to add a certain meaning to the main verb. This meaning varies according to the context; some modal verbs convey certainty, such as will. Others convey the idea of probability, such as may.

The structure of sentences with modal verbs in the affirmative form will follow the same structure as the aff irmative form of the present perfect and the past perfect. Observe:

As you can see, the modal verbs will be placed in the sentence in the same position as the auxiliary verbs. And they will be followed by another verb, the main verb that will always be in its base form.

Pay attention to some examples:

AFFIRMATIVE FORMModal verbs

subject + modal verb + main verb + complementsujeito + verbo modal + verbo principal + complemento

MODAL VERBS – MAY & WILLAffirmative form

subject + modal verb + main verb in the base form + complementsujeito + verbo modal + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

All these languages may affect us in a certain way, but only one of them will stand out over the others.

Todas essas linguagens podem nos afetar de certo modo, mas apenas uma delas vai se destacar sobre as demais.

This sentence follows the structure of aff irmative sentences with auxiliary verbs. The subject, all these languages, is followed by the modal verb may. Afterward we have the main verb, affect, which will remain in its base form. The complement comes at the end. Note that the modal verb may conveys the idea of probability to the main verb.

The sentence with the modal verb will follows the same structure. The subject only one of them is followed by will. Then, there is the main verb, stand out, also in its base form. At the end, we have the complement.



186

The modal verb will imprints a sense of certainty to the main verb show. Any minimal action is the subject, it is followed by will show, which is the modal verb and the main verb in its base form. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

Note that modal verbs can be used in the negative form. Since modal verbs behave as auxiliary verbs, the basic structure for the negative will be the same as the negative structure of the present perfect and the past perfect. Observe:

Modal verbs behave as auxiliary verbs because they accompany the main verb. However, in the present perfect and in the past perfect, the auxiliary verb to have does not convey any additional meaning to the main verb.

Modal verbs are invariable, they do not vary their conjugation according to the subject. Also, modal verbs do not have past participle, inf initive, or -ing forms.

However, they can be used to place an action in a timeline. That is the case of will, for instance, which is used to speak about the future. For example:

MODAL VERB WILL – AFFIRMATIVE FORM

certainty in the futurecerteza no futuro

Any minimal action will show your concern for the person and they will feel valued.

Qualquer ato mínimo vai mostrar sua preocupação pela pessoa e ela vai se sentir valorizada.

NEGATIVE FORM – AUXILIARY VERB + NOT

subject + auxiliary verb + not + main verb + complementsujeito + verbo auxiliar + not + verbo principal + complemento

Several verb forms follow this structure of the negative form, for example, the simple past, the present perfect, and the past perfect. However, the auxiliary verb will vary:



AUXILIARY VERBS

simple present do/doessimple past did

present perfect have/haspast perfect had

In the simple present, the auxiliary verb is do or does, depending on the subject. Did is the auxiliary verb in the simple past. Have or has is used in the case of the present perfect and had in the case of the past perfect.

These auxiliary verbs will be used in the negative form in the following structure: subject + auxiliary verb + not + main verb + complement.

For instance:



Some people prefer to get presents instead of receiving words of affirmation. But this does not reduce their importance.

Algumas pessoas preferem ganhar presentes ao invés de receber palavras de afirmação. Mas isso não reduz a importância delas.

This does not reduce is the negative form of the simple present. This is the subject, followed by the auxiliary verb does, which is conjugated according to the subject in the third person singular, and that is why it carries the -es. Afterward, we have the negative particle not and then the main verb in its base form.

The same structure will be followed in another verb form:



It hasn’t always been like that.Isso nem sempre foi assim.



The subject at the beginning of the sentence is it. It is followed by the auxiliary verb have, which is conjugated according to the subject as has. It is contracted with the negative particle not, forming hasn’t. Then, we have the main verb and the complement. As this sentence is in the present perfect, the main verb is in the past participle. Even so, the structure remains the same as the one used for the simple past and the simple present.

The same structure is applied to the negative form of sentences with modal verbs. Observe this example with may:

MODAL VERB MAY – NEGATIVE FORM

lack of probabilityfalta de probabilidade

subject + modal verb + not + main verb in the base form + complementsujeito + verbo modal + not + verbo principal na forma base + complemento

When we talk about physical touch, it has even greater importance, since some people may not like this type of interaction.

Quando falamos de contato f ísico, isso tem uma importância ainda maior pelo fato de que algumas pessoas podem não gostar desse tipo de

interação.

As you can see, the negative form of the modal verbs follows the same structure as the negative form of sentences that carry an auxiliary verb. The modal behaves as an auxiliary.

In the previous example, the subject is some people, the modal verb is followed by the negative particle: may not, and the main verb is in its base form – like. The rest of the sentence is the complement. May not implies a lack of probability.

In its negative form, may can convey yet another idea. It can be used to deny permission as an answer to a request for permission, or it can be used to form a statement that declares something is not allowed. For example:


lack of permissionfalta de permissão


Employees may not smoke in the building.Funcionários não podem fumar no prédio.



The structure remains the same: employees is the subject, then we have the modal verb may, followed by the negative particle not, and the main verb in its base form. This sentence conveys the idea of lack of permission.

Will can also be used in the negative form. Observe:

MODAL VERB WILL – NEGATIVE FORM

lack of certainty in the futurefalta de certeza no futuro


Due to unforeseen technical difficulties, the webinar will not take place.Devido a dif iculdades técnicas imprevistas, o webinário não vai ocorrer.

The subject is webinar. It is followed by will not, which can be contracted as won’t. This contracted form is used in informal situations and it sounds more natural in spoken language. In the previous sentence, the main verb is take place in its base form because it follows a modal verb. The rest of the sentence is the complement.

When used in questions, modal verbs may convey different ideas. For example, may is rarely used to ask about probability in its pure interrogative form. The interrogative form of may is commonly used to ask for permission.

In that case, the subject will usually be the first person, be it singular or plural. Observe an example:

MODAL VERB MAY – INTERROGATIVE FORM

asking for permissionpedir permissão

May I leave early on Fridays?Eu posso sair mais cedo às sextas?

This sentence is a request for permission. The modal verb may is in the beginning of the sentence, followed by the subject I. The main verb leave is in its base form and the rest is the complement.



As the permission request was made in the first person, the answer will be in the second person. The previous question could be answered as such:


refusing permissionrecusar permissão

No, you may not.Não, você não pode.

This sentence does not refer to a lack of probability but to a refusal of permission. The structure of this sentence is: subject + modal verb + not. This is the short answer. The full or complete answer is as follows:


refusing permissionrecusar permissão

No, you may not leave early on Fridays.Não, você não pode sair cedo às sextas.

The full answer follows the structure of the negative form seen so far.

The verb may can also be used to grant permission:

MODAL VERB MAY – AFFIRMATIVE FORM

granting permissionconceder permissão

Yes, you may.Sim, você pode.

Yes, you may leave early on Fridays.Sim, você pode sair mais cedo às sextas.



Observe that both sentences have similarities: the use of the modal verb may to grant permission. They also follow the affirmative structure of verb forms with auxiliary verbs seen previously. However, the short answer sounds more natural in daily conversations.

In the interrogative form, the modal verb will is going to follow the exact same structure as the modal verb may. However, it conveys a different meaning compared to its aff irmative and negative forms. For example:

MODAL VERB WILL – INTERROGATIVE FORM

question about the future / proposalpergunta sobre o futuro / proposta

modal verb + subject + main verb + complementverbo modal + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Will you and Gillian accept our project proposal and work with us?Você e a Gillian vão aceitar nossa proposta de projeto e trabalhar conosco?

The previous sentence could be a question about something that will happen in the future or to make a proposal. It depends on the context, and even though its idea might change, the structure does not.


MODAL VERB WILL – INTERROGATIVE FORM

question about the future / requestpergunta sobre o futuro / pedido

modal verb + subject + main verb + complementverbo modal + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Will you schedule the meeting, please?Você marca a reunião, por favor?

This sentence sounds as a request, especially because of the word please. It does not refer to a degree of certainty, but it may sound like a question about the future.

To answer questions with will either to talk about the future, accept proposals, or grant a request you could say:



MODAL VERB WILL – AFFIRMATIVE FORM

granting a request / accepting a proposal / talking about the futureacatar um pedido / aceitar uma proposta / falar sobre o futuro

Yes, I will.Sim, eu vou.

Yes, I will schedule the meeting.Sim, eu vou marcar a reunião.

The structure for the short answer is: subject + modal verb. As for the complete answer, it follows the structure of the aff irmative form of modal verbs seen so far.

In short, observe that the structure of interrogative sentences with modal verbs is the same structure used for the interrogative form of verbs different from to be in the simple present, simple past, present perfect, and past perfect. Observe:

INTERROGATIVE FORM – AUXILIARY VERBS

auxiliary verb + subject + main verb + complementverbo auxiliar + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Did Mary give the gifts to the team this afternoon?A Mary deu os presentes para a equipe essa tarde?

The auxiliary verb did comes at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the subject Mary. Then the main verb in its base form and the sentence’s complement. However, this question refers to an event in the past as indicated by the auxiliary verb did.

This structure also shapes the interrogative form of the present perfect:

INTERROGATIVE FORM – AUXILIARY VERBS

auxiliary verb + subject + main verb + complementverbo auxiliar + sujeito + verbo principal + complemento

Have you worked with Fred before?Você trabalhou com Fred antes?

The auxiliary verb have is at the beginning of the sentence, followed by the subject you, the main verb in the past participle worked, and at the end, the complement of the sentence.



In this chapter, you reviewed the affirmative, negative, and interrogative forms that you can apply to the verb forms seen

throughout this module. We also took the opportunity to find out how to use the modal verbs may and will – and the ideas they can imply depending on the context and the type of sentence in which we use them. If you want to learn more about these topics, you can

refer to the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.

GRAMMAR GUIDE

Affirmative Form Page 197Interrogative Form Page 215Modal Verb May Page 227Negative Form Page 230Will Page 310




Part 5.

Activities

1. The personnel department has grown within big companies. (interrogative form) O departamento pessoal cresceu dentro das grandes empresas.

2. Sally had prepared her presentation. (negative form) Sally tinha preparado a apresentação dela.

3. Some people prefer to get presents. (interrogative form) Algumas pessoas preferem ganhar presentes.

4. She went to the meeting. (negative form) Ela foi para a reunião.

5. You will schedule the meeting. (interrogative form) Você vai marcar a reunião.

6. It has always been like that. (negative form) Sempre foi assim.

7. I may leave early on Fridays. (negative form) Eu posso sair cedo às sextas.

8. Sally had prepared her presentation. (interrogative form) Sally tinha preparado sua apresentação.

A. Change the sentences into the negative or interrogative form according to the form in the parentheses.


1. will not / won’t take place2. may not smoke3. may affect us4. will stand out5. will schedule6. may not leave

1. Has the personnel department grown within big companies?2. Sally had not / hadn’t prepared her presentation.3. Do some people prefer to get presents?4. She did not / didn’t go to the meeting.5. Will you schedule the meeting?6. It has not / hasn’t always been like that.7. I may not leave early on Fridays.8. Had Sally prepared her presentation?


B. Fill in the blanks with the missing words according to the idea expressed in parentheses.

1. Due to unforeseen technical difficulties, the webinar . (lack of certainty in the future)

Devido a dif iculdades técnicas imprevistas, o webinário não vai ocorrer.

2. Employees in the building. (lack of permission)

Funcionários não podem fumar no prédio.

3. All these languages in a certain way, … (probability)

Todas essas linguagens podem nos afetar de certo modo, ...

4. …but only one of them over the others. (certainty in the future)

...mas apenas uma delas vai se destacar sobre as demais.

5. Yes, I the meeting. (talking about the future)

Sim, eu vou marcar a reunião.

6. No, you early on Fridays. (refusing permission)

Não, você não pode sair cedo às sextas.


Grammar Guide.

Subject + (Auxiliary Verb) + Main Verb + (Complement)Sujeito + (Verbo Auxiliar) + Verbo Principal + Complemento

The basic affirmative sentence structure in English is the subject, depending on the verb form, an auxiliary verb, the main verb, and the complement, if necessary.

In English, all verb forms will take a subject that cannot be omitted from the sentence. The only verb form in which the subject is usually omitted is the imperative.

The subject may be omitted in the imperative form in English because it is always used to refer to the person or people we are talking to.

BASIC AFFIRMATIVE SENTENCE STRUCTURE

IMPERATIVE FORM

Affirmative Structure: Main Verb + Complement

Open your books.Abram seus livros.

(Main Verb: open; Complement: your books)

Speak slowly, please.Fale pausadamente, por favor.

(Main Verb: speak; Complement: slowly, please)


Affirmative Form

In the affirmative of the simple forms, that is, the simple present and simple past, the auxiliary verb is generally not used. Thus, the structure for the aff irmative form is:

Apart from the imperative and the simple forms, every other verb form will take one or more auxiliary verbs in the affirmative.

The auxiliary will vary according to the verb form. Modal verbs and the verbs be, have, or do can function as auxiliaries. In the aff irmative form, they will always be placed in between the subject and the main verb. Some verb forms require more than one auxiliary verb.

Check it out:

AFFIRMATIVE STRUCTURESubject + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

AFFIRMATIVE STRUCTURESubject + Auxiliary Verb(s) + Main Verb + (Complement)

We go to work at 7 a.m.Nós vamos para o trabalho às 7h da manhã.

(Subject: we; Main Verb: go; Complement: to work at 7 a.m.)

I went to the movies yesterday.Eu fui ao cinema ontem.

(Subject: I; Main Verb: went; Complement: to the movies yesterday)

I’m reading an excellent book.Eu estou lendo um livro excelente.

(Subject: I; Auxiliary Verb: am; Main Verb: reading; Complement: an excellent book)

You should travel with us.Você deveria viajar conosco.

(Subject: You; Auxiliary Verb: should; Main Verb: travel; Complement: with us)

Julia has been working hard this month.Julia vem trabalhando duro neste mês.

(Subject: Julia; Auxiliary Verbs: has been; Main Verb: working; Complement: hard this month)

And now you know the basic sentence structure of the affirmative form in English.


The structure be + going to is often used to refer to the future.

When the structure be + going to refers to the future, the verb to be is used in the simple present followed by going to and a verb in its base form.

BE + GOING TO: FUTURE

Be (Simple Present) + Going to + Verb (Base Form)

I’m going to travel next week.Eu vou viajar semana que vem.

We use be + going to when we want to talk about future events or actions that were planned beforehand. That is, when we use this structure, we may want to emphasize the fact that we have been planning this future event.

BE + GOING TO

We are going to buy a new house.Nós vamos comprar uma casa nova.

(The people who made this decision had to reach an agreement to decide when, why, and how to do that.)

I am going to Mexico on my next vacation.Eu estou indo para o México nas minhas próximas férias.

(I had to decide the destination, choose the dates, book a f light, a hotel, a car, etc.)


Be + Going To (Future)

Be + going to is also used to talk about predictions based on evidence. That is, according to the speaker’s point of view, there’s evidence that this future event is going to happen.

BE + GOING TO

It’s really cloudy. It is going to rain.Está muito nublado. Vai chover.(The cloudy sky is an evidence.)

It’s the second time you arrive late. You are going to get into serious trouble.É a segunda vez que você chega atrasado. Você vai ter sérios problemas.

(From the speaker’s knowledge of the facts, arriving late again is evidence that you are getting into trouble.)

Another use of be + going to is to insist that people do or do not things. This is a way to add emphasis to the fact that something is obligatory. Check some examples.

BE + GOING TO

You are going to wash your hand before you sit at the table.Você vai lavar a mão antes de se sentar à mesa.

(You are telling what the person has to do, emphasizing the person has to wash their hands f irst).

You are not going to play until you finish your homework.Você não vai brincar até terminar a sua lição de casa.

(You are saying what is not going to happen—play—if something isn’t done before—the homework.)

In informal speech, you can replace going to with gonna.

BE + GOING TO

I’m gonna talk to her.Eu vou falar com ela.(gonna = going to)


Now, analyze the use of will and be + going to when referring to the future. Mostly, you can use them interchangeably. The differences in use may be very subtle and have a lot to do with the speaker’s intention. That happens because choosing between will or be + going to depends on the speaker’s perspective and interpretation of that future event. In some contexts, one structure might sound more natural than the other.

WILL VS. BE + GOING TO

Julia, will you marry me?Julia, você quer se casar comigo?

There are some reasons why asking this question with will sounds more natural and more appropriate than with going to.


First, the modal verb will convey an idea of willingness, that is, something you want to do or want it to happen. Primeiro, o modal verb will traz uma ideia de vontade, ou seja, algo que você quer fazer ou quer que aconteça.

Second, John expects Julia to make an instant decision. That is, John may have planned to propose to Julia, but Julia is listening to that for the first time, and she’s expected to make a decision about that future event at the moment of the conversation.Segundo, o John espera que a Julia tome uma decisão imediata. Ou seja, o John pode ter planejado pedir a Julia em casamento, mas a Julia está ouvindo a proposta pela primeira vez, e espera-se que ela tome uma decisão sobre esse evento futuro no momento da conversa.

Imagine this situation. There is a man named John who decides to propose to his girlfriend, Julia. In this case, will is preferred.


Now imagine that Julia accepts John’s proposal. They schedule a date and start to plan the wedding. Julia goes to a bridal shop to choose the dress and the salesperson may ask her about the wedding.

In this situation, be + going to sounds more natural and even more appropriate since Julia and John have been planning this future event beforehand.


Salesperson: When is the wedding?Vendedor: Quando é o casamento?

Now you know more about the structure be + going to, its uses, and some differences between will and be + going to.

Julia: It’s going to be in June.Julia: Vai ser em junho.


Be + going to is frequently used to talk about plans. We can use it to refer to a future event that has been planned or to refer to a past event that had been planned but did not happen, or to something that was supposed to happen but didn’t.

The structure is basically the same: the only thing that will change is how we use the verb to be: in the present if we are referring to a future event, or in the past when referring to past event.

Referring to the FutureBe in the Present (am/is/are) + Going to + Verb (Base Form)

Referring to the PastBe in the Past (was/were) + Going to + Verb (Base Form)

BE + GOING TO

Check out some sentences so that we can understand when to use these structures:

Referring to the FutureI am going to text you the doctor’s phone.

Eu vou te mandar uma mensagem com o telefone do médico.(I’m talking about something that I intend to do.)

BE + GOING TO

Referring to the PastI was going to text you, but my day was crazy, and I just forgot to.

Eu ia te mandar uma mensagem, mas o meu dia foi corrido, e eu simplesmente esqueci.

(I had planned to text you, but it didn’t happen.)


Be + Going To (Past)

As we frequently use be + going to in the past to talk about a plan that we had but ended up not happening, the sentences containing this structure are usually followed by an explanation of why you changed your mind or of what prevented it from happening.

Referring to the PastI was going to text you, but my day was crazy, and I just forgot to.

Eu ia te mandar uma mensagem, mas o meu dia foi corrido, e eu simplesmente esqueci.

(There is an explanation of why it did not happen.)

BE + GOING TO

There’s still another use for be + going to referring to the past. We can use it to talk about something we imagined in the past as very likely to happen in the future.

I’ve always known Sophie and Mark were going to get married one day.Eu sempre soube que a Sophie e o Mark iriam se casar um dia.

(I’ve always had this feeling that they would get married someday, and it turns out they did).

BE + GOING TO

Now you know more about the structure be + going to and how to use it to refer to the future and to the past.


Prepositions are used to show a relationship in time or space or a relationship between people, places, or things. When accomplishing these functions, prepositions usually have a meaning of their own, or at least follow some patterns that will help us decide which of them to use.

For example:

The preposition with usually indicates that two or more people or things are together. When referring to a place, the preposition in usually indicates that you are inside or into a closed space. And, if we are referring to time, the preposition for indicates a period of time.

Dependent prepositions, on the other hand, hardly have a meaning of their own—they will always follow adjectives, nouns, and verbs, and are subject to their regency.

Although the concept and use of dependent prepositions exist in several languages, most of times they cannot be translated considering their isolated meaning, that is, their meaning as prepositions that refer to time, space, or relationship. The meaning of dependent prepositions relies on the expression they form.

WITH Indicates relationship—two or more things or people together

I’ll travel with my friends.Eu vou viajar com os meus amigos.

IN Referring to place—inside or into a closed space

The teacher is in the classroom.O professor está na sala de aula.

FOR Referring to time; indicates a period

We’ve been waiting for two hours.Nós estamos esperando há duas horas.



Dependent Prepositons

Check some example of adjectives followed by prepositions.

DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONSAdjectives

It’s normal to get confused about the use of prepositions.É normal f icar confuso com o uso de preposições.

Confusedabout

I’m prepared for this test.Eu estou preparado para esse teste.

Preparedfor

I’m interested in this topic.Eu estou interessado nesse tópico.

Interestedin

I’m tired of this situation.Eu estou cansado dessa situação.

Tiredof

Kate is married to Tony.Kate é casada com Tony.

Marriedto

I’m worried about you.Eu estou preocupado com você.

Worriedabout

What’s wrong with you?O que há de errado com você?

Wrongwith

I’m amazed at your performance.I’m amazed by your performance.

Eu estou impressionado com a sua performance.

Amazedat/by


When adjectives or nouns depend on prepositions, the verb immediately after a dependent preposition will be in the -ING form.

The problem of doing everything in a hurry is that you always forget something.O problema de fazer tudo com pressa é que você sempre esquece alguma coisa.

(The noun problem depends on the preposition of, and as the verb to do comes after the preposition, it needs the -ING form, doing.)

We all know the risks of getting a virus if we don’t protect our computer.Todos nós sabemos dos riscos de pegar um vírus se não protegermos nosso computador.

(The noun risks depends on the preposition of, and as the verb comes after the preposition, it needs the -ING form, getting.)

Sam is not good at cooking.Sam não é bom em cozinhar.

(Here, the adjective good is dependent on the preposition at, and as the verb comes after the preposition, it needs the –ING form.)

We are really excited about taking this trip.Nós estamos muito empolgados em fazer essa viagem.

(The adjective depends on the preposition, and as the verb comes after the preposition, it needs the –ING form.)


Nouns can also be followed by prepositions.

DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONSNouns

Congratulations on your new job.Parabéns pelo seu novo trabalho.

Congratulations on

I’ll need some knowledge of business English for this job.Vou precisar de conhecimentos de inglês executivo para este trabalho.

Knowledgeof

Can I have some information on this new course?Can I have some information about this new course?

Posso ter mais informações sobre esse novo curso?

Informationon/about


Now some verbs will also have dependent prepositions. These verbs are usually called prepositional verbs.

DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONSPrepositional Verbs

I came to work by bus today.Eu vim para o trabalho de ônibus hoje.

I’m coming from work.Eu estou vindo do trabalho.

To come to/from

I dreamed of/about you last night.Eu sonhei com você na noite passada.

To dreamof/about

I went to work early today.Eu fui para o trabalho cedo hoje.

To goto

I thought of/about you today.Eu pensei em você hoje.

To thinkof/about

I listened to your song and I loved it!Eu ouvi sua música e adorei!

To listento

Thank you for your visit.Obrigado pela sua visita.

To thankfor

I traveled to Europe on my vacation.Eu viajei para Europa nas minhas férias.

To travelto

I’ll wait for you here.Eu vou esperar por você aqui.

To waitfor


Now you know how to identify and use dependent prepositions. But it’s important to remember that there are tons of adjectives, nouns, and verbs that will be followed by prepositions.

Staying in touch with the language will always help you memorize them faster, but in case you are not sure about the preposition you need to use, you can always look it up in a dictionary. You

just need to look up the adjective, noun, or verb, and the dictionary will show you the correct preposition to use after them.

It’s important to notice the difference between prepositional verbs, that is, verbs followed by dependent prepositions, and phrasal verbs.

Dependent prepositions work as a connection between the verb and its complement. This is why there must always be a complement after prepositional verbs.

Phrasal verbs may be formed by a verb + a preposition, but this construction usually forms a new meaning different from the meaning of the verb used on its own, and they might be used without a complement. Check some examples.

PHRASAL VERBSIt’s late. You need to get up.

Está tarde. Você precisa levantar.

Go ahead. Don’t be shy. Your presentation is very good.Vá em frente. Não seja tímida. Sua apresentação está muito boa.

DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONSWe must get to work before 9 a.m.

Nós temos que estar no trabalho antes das 9h da manhã.

Maya, go to the front of the class and present your project.Maya, vá até a frente da sala e apresente seu projeto.

PHRASAL VERBS VS. DEPENDENT PREPOSITIONS


The imperative form is used to tell people what to do and for this reason it does not have an interrogative form. The Imperative is only used in the affirmative and negative forms.

In English, the imperative performs many functions. It can be used to give orders or to demand something, to instruct, to give advice or recommendation, or to encourage someone.

Affirmative FormMain Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Go there.Vá lá.

Negative FormAuxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Don’t come here.Não venha aqui.

IMPERATIVE FORMStructure

IMPERATIVE FORMFunctions

1. Order; demand

Open your book. Don’t get in. Abra o seu livro. Não entre.

2. Instructions

Mix the ingredients and add salt. Don’t put too much salt. Misture os ingredientes e adicione sal. Não coloque muito sal.


Imperative

3. Advice, suggestions

Have a cup of tea and rest. Don’t forget to take your coat.Tome uma xícara de chá e descanse. Não se esqueça de levar seu casaco.

4. Requests; favors

Bring it to me, please. Don’t tell John, please. Traga isso para mim, por favor. Não conte para o John, por favor.

5. Encouragement

Try again! You can do it. Don’t give up. You can do it. Tente novamente! Você consegue. Não desista. Você consegue.

Imperative sentences are always addressed to the listener or listeners. So, the subject is always in the second person, which is “you,” in the singular or plural forms. For that reason, in most imperative sentences, the subject is omitted.

However, the subject can be included in imperative sentences to add emphasis to the action. In such cases, it will be placed before the main verb, in both aff irmative and negative sentences.

Affirmative FormSubject (second person) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

You sit down now.Sente-se agora.

Negative FormAuxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Subject (second person) +

Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement

Don’t you lie to me.Não minta para mim.

IMPERATIVE FORMUsing the Subject to Add Emphasis


In English, we can only use the imperative form to address the person or people to whom we are talking. But if we want to make suggestions or requests in the first person, we can use the verb let in the imperative.

We’ll use the verb let in the imperative form, the object pronoun for the first person, which is either “me” or “us,” a verb in the infinitive form (without to), and the complement.

Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the First Person (me/us) + Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)

Let me see.Deixe-me ver.

Let me help you.Deixe-me ajudá-lo.

Let’s meet tomorrow. (Let’s Let us)Vamos nos encontrar amanhã.

Let’s watch a movie tonight. (Let’s Let us)Vamos assistir a um filme hoje à noite.

INDEFINITE ARTICLEMaking Suggestions or Requests in the First Person

We can use the same structure to make suggestions or requests for a third person. To do that, we just have to use the object pronouns in the third person.

Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the Third Person (him/her/it/them) + Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)

Let it go.Deixe isso para lá.

Let him stay.Deixe-o f icar.

Let them talk.Deixe-os falar.

IMPERATIVE FORMMaking Suggestions or Requests for a Third Person

And this is how we use the imperative in English.


The infinitive form of the verb is the verb in its base form. In English, the infinitive form is preceded by the particle “to.”

Have a look at some examples of verbs in the infinitive form:

Just like it happens in most languages, the infinitive form is used in several instances in English. One of the most common uses of the infinitive in English is to follow other verbs.

To eatComer

To speakFalar

To goIr

To travelViajar

To studyEstudar

To workTrabalhar

We want to travel next month.Nós queremos viajar mês que vem.

(verb: want in the simple present + inf initive: to travel)

She needs to study for the exam.Ela tem que estudar para a prova.

(verb: need in the simple present + inf initive: to study)

Did you have to work last week?Você teve que trabalhar semana passada?

(verb: have in the simple past interrogative + infinitive: to work)

INFINITIVE FORM

VERB + INFINITIVE


Infinitive Form

And the infinitive form is also frequently used after some adjectives.

All of these sentences have examples of verbs in the infinitive form, which is also called to-infinitive, because it is composed of two words in English: the particle to + the verb.

But in English we also use the bare infinitive, which is the verb in the infinitive form, but not preceded by the particle “to.” This is how verbs appear in the dictionary, and it’s also used after some verbs.

And this is how we use the infinitive form in English.

I’m happy to see you!Eu estou feliz em ver você!

(adjective: happy + inf initive: to see)

You are not allowed to stay here.Você não tem permissão para f icar aqui.(adjective: allowed + inf initive: to stay)

I’m ready to start.Estou pronto para começar.

(adjective: ready + inf initive: to start)

They watched me do the job before they tried it.Eles me viram fazer o trabalho antes de tentarem.

(verb: watch in the simple past + object: me + bare inf initive do)

We can’t travel with you this weekend.Nós não podemos viajar com vocês neste f im de semana.

(modal verb can in the negative + bare inf initive travel)

They will finish this job tomorrow.Eles vão terminar esse trabalho amanhã.(modal verb will + bare inf initive finish)

ADJECTIVE + INFINITIVE

VERB + BARE INFINITIVE


Interrogative sentences in English follow some basic structures.

In a sentence with the verb to be as the main verb in the simple present or the simple past, there is no need to use an auxiliary verb. Therefore, the sentence will have the following structure: the verb to be as the main verb, the subject, and the complement.

Sentences that have one auxiliary or modal verb are made by placing the auxiliary right before the subject, and then the main verb, which may be followed by a complement.

In the case of verb forms that have more than one auxiliary, the structure is the first auxiliary verb, the subject, and then the second or third auxiliary verbs, followed by the main the verb and a complement, if necessary.

Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (Simple Present and Simple Past)Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Complemento (Simple Present and Simple Past)

Auxiliary or Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)Verbo Auxiliar ou Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento (se necessário)

First Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Other Auxiliaries + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Primeiro Verbo Auxiliar + Sujeito + Outros Auxiliares + Verbo Principal + Complemento (se necessário)

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCESStructures


Interrogative Form

However, in the case of verb forms in which the main verb is not the verb to be, one auxiliary verb or a modal verb is required.

Check out some examples with these structures. In verb forms such as the simple present and the simple past, in which the verb to be is the main verb, we don’t need an auxiliary to ask a question.

Structure: Verb To Be + Subject + Complement

Is she a lawyer?Ela é advogada?

Were you home last night?Você estava em casa na noite passada?

Structure: Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Does she work as a lawyer? (main verb: work)Ela trabalha como advogada?

(The verb to do works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple present)

Did you do your homework? (main verb: do)Você fez sua lição de casa?

(The verb to do works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple past)

Can you help me? (main verb: help)Você pode me ajudar?

(The modal verb can works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the simple present)

Are you studying for the test? (main verb: study in the -ING form)Você está estudando para a prova?

(The verb to be works as an auxiliary, and the sentence is in the present continuous)

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCESVerb forms with the verb to be as the main verb (simple present and simple past)

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCESVerb forms with other verbs as the main verb


Question Full Answer Short Answer Wrong Answer

Do you like chocolate? Yes, I like chocolate. Yes, I do. Yes, I like.Você gosta de chocolate? Sim, eu gosto de chocolate. Sim, eu gosto.

Depending on the verb form, there may be more than one auxiliary verb before the main verb, which is the case of the present perfect continuous.

Notice that in English when someone asks a question using auxiliaries, we can give a long or a short answer, and to give a short answer we need to use the auxiliary verb.

Structure: First Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Other Auxiliaries + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Have you been studying for the test? (main verb: study in the -ING form)Você tem estudado para a prova?

(The verb to have works as the f irst auxiliary, and the verb to be in the past participle, as the second)

Have you been waiting for a long time? (main verb: wait in the -ING form)Você está esperando há muito tempo?

(The verb to have works as the f irst auxiliary, and the verb to be in the past participle, as the second)

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCESVerbs forms with more than one auxiliary verb

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCESLong and short answers

And this is how we use the interrogative form in English. Now, you know its basic sentence structure.


Irregular verbs are those that do not follow the rule for regular verbs. These verbs have different forms in the past that do not follow specif ic spelling rules. Some will have a different ending, some will have a vowel change, some will become totally different from their base form, and some won’t change at all.

The verb to read has no change in spelling. However, the pronunciation of the central vowel will be different.

Another group of irregular verbs will change the stressed vowel in their past forms.

To cut (cut)cortar

To begin (began)começar

To come (came)vir

To give (gave)dar

To know (knew)saber, conhecer

To run (ran)correr

To see (saw)ver

To hurt (hurt)machucar

To let (let)deixar, permitir

To put (put)botar, colocar

IRREGULAR VERBSNo Change

REGULAR VERBSChange the Stressed Vowel


Irregular Verbs Past

To break (broke)quebrar

To have (had)ter

To take (took)levar, tomar

To drive (drove)dirigir

To understand (understood)entender, compreender

To bring (brought)trazer

To make (made)fazer

To tell (told)contar, dizer

To get (got)pegar, conseguir

To win (won)ganhar

To buy (bought)comprar

To say (said)falar, dizer

To think (thought)pensar, achar

To speak (spoke)falar

To write (wrote)escrever

IRREGULAR VERBSChange the Stressed Vowel to “O” or “OU”

IRREGULAR VERBSChange to end in a “D” Sound

Still in the group of irregular verbs that undergo changes in the stressed vowel, there is a very large group of verbs that will change the vowels from the base form to the vowel o, which is sometimes spelled “ou.” In some verbs from this group this will be the only change. Others undergo some additional changes.

Another group of irregular verbs will be altered in order to have the final syllable of their past forms sounding as a D. Among the most frequent verbs, we can highlight three.

These widely used verbs are: to have, in the past had, to make, in the past made, and to say, in the past said (in this case we dropped the -Y and added –ID).


There’s also a group that will vary to have the ending -T in the simple past.

In addition to the ending, another feature of this group of verbs is that the stressed vowel in the base form, pronounced as a long vowel, in the past becomes a short vowel. For example, the verb to feel. The stressed vowel has a long sound. But, in the past, it’s felt, which is a short vowel, and it ends in -T.

Check out a group of verbs that undergo similar changes:

There are three very frequent verbs in English that do not f it any of the aforementioned groups, which are the verbs to be, to go, and to do.

The verb to be is the most irregular verb in English. In the past, it is the only verb to have two different conjugations: was and were. Look at the conjugation table of the verb to be in the past.

To feel (felt)sentir

To meet (met)encontrar, conhecer

To keep (kept)manter, permancer

To lose (lost)perder

To leave (left)sair, partir, deixar

To leave (left)sair, partir, deixar

REGULAR VERBSChange the Stressed Vowel

To do (did)fazer

Subject Pronoun Verb To Be (Simple Past) I/he/she/it was you/we/they were

To go (went)ir

To be (was/were)ser, estar

IRREGULAR VERBSNo pattern

IRREGULAR VERBSTo Be (ser/estar)

And now you know some irregular verbs in the past.



I’ve seen so many beautiful places. I couldn’t have chosen just one to write about.Eu vi muitos lugares bonitos. Eu não poderia ter escolhido escrever sobre apenas um.

(seen = past participle of to see; chosen = past participle of to choose)

In this grammar guide, we’ll tackle irregular verbs in the past participle. It’s important to highlight that, among the most commonly used verbs in English, there are only about 200 irregular verbs. That means that most of the verbs are regular.

But although there aren’t many irregular verbs in English, it’s fair to say that they deserve some special attention, since there is not a pattern that applies to all of them.

In English, the past participle is used with some perfect forms in the active voice, namely the present perfect, the past perfect, the future perfect, and modal verbs + perfect, and it is also used with all the verb forms in the passive voice.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSPerfect Forms

The tradition was kept by many people around the country.A tradição foi mantida por muitas pessoas ao redor do país.

She was chosen as the employee of the month.Ela foi escolhida a funcionária do mês.

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSPassive Voice

Check some examples in the passive voice:

If you want to learn more about the perfect forms or the passive voice, check the grammar guides on these topics. They both use the past participle, and that’s why it’s important to focus on this topic.

Irregular Verbs - Past Participle


The regular verbs in the past participle follow the same pattern of the past forms.

As for the irregular verbs, some of them will keep the same form as the one used for the past, some of them will keep the base form—although they might differ from the past form—and others will have a totally different form.

In the f irst case, the verbs have the same form for the past and past participle grouped by phonological patterns.

The same rule applies for the verbs to mean, to read, and to hear, for example.

Base Form

KeepManter

SleepDormir

MeetEncontrar, conhecer

Past

Kept

Slept

Met

Past Participle

Kept

Slept

Met

Base Form

MeanSignif icar

ReadLer

HearOuvir

Past

Meant

Read

Heard

Past Participle

Meant

Read

Heard

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSPast = Past Participle



Verbs ending in -ELL change to -OLD and keep the same form in the past and past participle.

Base Form

FindEncontrar, achar

BringTrazer

ThinkPensar, achar

Past

Found

Brought

Thought

Past Participle

Found

Brought

Thought

Base Form

SellVender

TellDizer, contar

Past

Sold

Told

Past Participle

Sold

Told



In the same group, we’ll f ind the verbs to f ind, to bring, and to think, which will have the same form in the past and in the past participle.


Another group of verbs will undergo some changes in their past forms, but their past participle forms are spelled and pronounced just like their base forms.

Base Form

BetApostar

CutCortar

HurtMachucar

Past

Bet

Cut

Hurt

Past Participle

Bet

Cut

Hurt

Base Form

ComeVir

RunCorrer

BecomeTornar-se

Past

Came

Ran

Became

Past Participle

Come

Run

Become

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSKeep the same form

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSBase form = Past Participle

There is a group of verbs that do not change their base forms in the past. This group will also keep the same form in the past participle.


For some others, we’ll add -N or -EN to the base form to make the past participle, and they may change the pronunciation of the stressed vowel.

Base Form

BreakQuebrar

ChooseEscolher

GetPegar, conseguir

Past

Broke

Chose

Got

Past Participle

Broken

Chosen

Gotten

Base Form

DriveDirigir

RideMontar

WriteEscrever

EatComer

FallCair

ForbidProibir

Past

Drove

Rode

Wrote

Ate

Fell

Forbade

Past Participle

Driven

Ridden

Written

Eaten

Fallen

Forbidden

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSPast Participle = Past + -N or -EN

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSBase form = Past Participle

Moreover, there is a group of verbs that have three different forms. Check some examples grouped according to phonological patterns as we did with the f irst group.

To make the past participle of some verbs, we’ll repeat the same form of the past and add -N or -EN.


And now you know the past participle of irregular verbs, when to use it, as well as how to use it in the active and passive voices.

The highly frequent verbs to be, to do, and to go also have different forms. Check it on the table.

Notice that there are two different past forms for the verb to be, but there is only one for the past participle, which is been.

Base Form

GrowCrescer

KnowSaber, conhecer

FlyVoar

Past

Grew

Knew

Flew

Past Participle

Grown

Known

Flown

Base Form

BeSer, estar

DoFazer

GoIr

Past

Was/Were

Did

Went

Past Participle

Been

Done

Gone

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBSPast (-EW) = Past Participle (-OWN)

PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS

Some verbs that end in -EW in the past, will have their endings changed to -OWN in the past participle.

Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning to the main verb. Modal verbs can express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption, obligation, or prohibition.

The sentence structure of modal verbs follows the same pattern:

MODAL VERBSSentence Structure

Affirmative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Negative Form

Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)

Interrogative Form

Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)


Modal Verb May

It may rain.Pode chover. / Pode ser que chova.

(There is a reasonable chance that it will rain).

I may go to the party.Eu posso ir à festa. / Pode ser que eu vá à festa.

(There is a reasonable chance that I will go to the party).

She may be at home.Ela pode estar em casa. / Pode ser que ela esteja em casa.

(There is a reasonable chance that she will be home).

I may not be the best student in class, but I’m very dedicated.Eu posso não ser o melhor aluno da turma, mas eu sou muito dedicado.

Be careful with the pieces of news you read on social media. They may not be true.Tenha cuidado com notícias que você lê nas redes sociais. Elas podem não ser verdadeiras.

Researchers may not be able to find the cure to some diseases, but they’ve been doing their best.

Pesquisadores podem (até) não ser capazes de achar a cura para algumas doenças, mas eles têm dado o melhor de si.

MODAL VERB MAYExpressing Probability

MODAL VERB MAYExpressing Unlikely Things

The modal verb may can be used to express probability.

In such cases, we are saying that something is likely to happen, that there’s a chance that something will happen. For example:

The modal verb may can also be used to say that there is a chance that something does not happen.

In this case, we use it in the negative form. Take a look:


It is rare to see may in the interrogative form to give the idea of probability.

The interrogative form is used as a formal way to ask for permission. In such cases, may is used in questions in the first person, either singular or plural.

When we ask for permission, the interrogative form can only be used in the first person.

However, when we answer these permission requests, that is, when we give permission or not, we will use the aff irmative or the negative forms in the second person. Have a look:

MODAL VERB MAYAsking for Permission

MODAL VERB MAYGiving Permission (or not)

Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?

(May I come in? = First person singular – I).

May we talk to you for a minute, sir?Nós podemos falar com senhor por um minuto?

(May we talk…? = First person plural – We).

Asking for permission: Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in? Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may come in. / No, you may not come in. Sim, você pode entrar. / Não, você não pode entrar.

Asking for permission: May we talk to you for a minute, sir? Nós podemos falar com o senhor por um minuto?Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may. / No, you may not. Sim, vocês podem. / Não, vocês não podem.

And now you know how to use the modal verb may.


Subject + Main Verb (To Be) + NOT + ComplementSujeito + Verbo Principal (To Be) + NOT + Complemento

In English, negative sentences follow three basic structures.

One is for sentences in simple tenses in which the main verb is the verb to be. In this case, there is no auxiliary. So, the structure would be the subject, the main verb (which is the verb to be), then NOT, which is the negative particle, and a complement.

NEGATIVE SENTENCESBasic Structures

The second is for sentences that have one auxiliary verb or a modal auxiliary. In this case, the structure is the subject, the auxiliary or modal verb, then NOT to indicate the negative, the main verb, and the complement.


Subject + Auxiliary or Modal Verb + NOT + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar ou Modal Verb + NOT + Verbo Principal + Complemento (se necessário)

And the third is when there’s more than one auxiliary. In this case, the structure is the subject, the first auxiliary verb followed by NOT, which indicates the negative, then the second or second and third auxiliaries, depending on the verb form, then the main verb, and the complement.

Subject + First Auxiliary + NOT + Other Auxiliaries + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)Sujeito + Primeiro Auxiliar + NOT + Outros Auxiliares + Verbo Principal + Complemento (se necessário)



Negative Form

There is only one verb form that does not f it in the previous structures, which is the negative imperative, in which we usually omit the subject.

Structure: Do + NOT (Don’t) + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

Don’t do this.Não faça isso.

Don’t open the box.Não abra a caixa.

NEGATIVE SENTENCESImperative Structure

Besides the imperative, all verb forms in English take a subject and follow one of the three basic structures to make the negative.

If we use the simple forms, that is, the simple present and the simple past, with the verb to be as the main verb, we will not use an auxiliary to make negative statements.

Structure: Subject + Verb To Be + NOT + Complement

She isn’t (is not) home now.Ela não está em casa agora.

They weren’t (were not) home yesterday.Eles não estavam em casa ontem.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES


For all other verbs, to make negative statements we need at least one auxiliary verb before the word not.

The verbs that function as auxiliary verbs are the modal verbs, and the verbs do, have, and be, depending on the verb form.

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary + NOT + Main Verb + Complement (if necessary)

He doesn’t (does not) work on weekends.Ele não trabalha aos f inais de semana.

She didn’t (did not) do that.Ela não fez aquilo.

They aren’t (are not) studying this month.Eles não estão estudando este mês.

I haven’t (have not) seen him in ages.Eu não o vejo há séculos.

I can’t (cannot) help now.Eu não posso ajudar agora.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

Some verb forms will take more than one auxiliary verb. It’s the case of the present perfect continuous, which takes two auxiliary verbs. In this case, we’ll place the negative particle NOT right after the first auxiliary.

Structure: Subject + First Auxiliary + NOT + Other Auxiliaries + Main Verb + Complement

Julia hasn’t (has not) been studying as she should.Julia não vem estudando como deveria.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES


Negatives sentences are made using the negative particle not. However, you may see no as a negative particle as well.

They are both used to make negative statements, but the particle no is used mostly before nouns, or to answer questions, whereas not is the particle that adds a negative meaning to the verb or that is combined with words other than nouns.

No used to answer questions and before nounsNot denies words other than nouns

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

QuestionDo you have any money?Você tem algum dinheiro?

Possible Answers:1. No, I have no money.

Não, eu não tenho dinheiro.(The particle “no” goes before the noun “money” in an aff irmative structure.)

2. No, I don’t (do + not) have any money.Não, eu não tenho dinheiro algum.

(The particle “not” adds a negative meaning to the auxiliary verb “do.”)

Check the uses of not and no with the examples in the following box.

You cannot use not and no in the same sentence, as in:

No, I don’t have no money.

You cannot use two negative statements (not and no) in the same sentence.Você não pode usar duas partículas negativas na mesma frase.


Now you know the basic sentence structure of the negative form in English and how to use no and not.

However, in many contexts, it is the speaker’s choice to deny the noun, using no, or other parts of the sentence, using not.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

It’s no secret that John is in love with Karen.It isn’t a secret that John is in love with Karen.

Não é segredo que o John está apaixonado pela Karen.

(particle “no” before the noun “secret”: no secret)(particle “not” after the verb “to be”: is not / isn’t)

There are no tables available for tonight. There aren’t tables available for tonight.

Não há mesas disponíveis para hoje à noite.

(particle “no” before the noun “tables”: no tables)(particle “not” after the verb “to be”: are not / aren’t)

Not surprisingly, Kim had the highest score in the class.No surprisingly, Kim had the highest score in the class.

Não é de surpreender que a Kim teve a nota mais alta da turma.

(The only possibility is to use “not” before the adverb “surprisingly” because there isn’t a noun)


There are two types of personal pronouns in English: personal pronouns used in the subject position, which, for that reason, are called subject pronouns, and personal pronouns used in the object position, which are called object pronouns.

Check the following table to see the subject and object pronouns.

Subject Pronouns Object Pronouns (Replace nouns as subjects) (Replace nouns as objects)

I me eu me/mim you you tu/você te/ti/você/lhe

he him ele ele/o/lhe

she her ela ela/a/lhe

it it ele/ela ele/ela/o/a/lhe

we us nós nos/nós

you you vós/vocês vos/vocês/lhes

they them eles/elas eles/elas/os/as/lhes

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

Second personsingular

Second personplural

Third personplural

Third personsingular

First personsingular

First personplural


Object Pronouns

OBJECT PRONOUNFirst Person Singular

OBJECT PRONOUNFirst Person Plural

Tell me. What is your problem?Conte-me. Qual é o seu problema?

Read this story to me, please!Leia esta história para mim, por favor!

Do you want to talk to me?Você quer falar comigo?

Tell us about your day.Conte-nos sobre o seu dia.

Are they talking about us?Eles estão falando sobre nós / a gente?

Do you want to go to the movies with us?Você quer ir ao cinema conosco / com a gente?

Object pronouns are usually placed after the main verb of the sentence, since they function as the object of these verbs. They might not be placed immediately after the main verb, but they will always come after it. The only exception to this rule is when they are used in certain expressions such as both of us, all of them, none of you, etc. In such situations, they can be part of the subject of a sentence.

Let’s now take a closer look at each object pronoun.

Some languages present variations of the object pronouns used depending on the verb they are complementing. But that won’t happen in English.

The first-person pronouns used in the position of the object of the sentence will always be me for the singular and us for the plural.


I’ll help you.Eu vou te ajudar. / Eu vou ajudar você. / Eu vou lhe ajudar. /

Eu vou ajudar vocês/ Eu vou lhes ajudar.

I don’t understand you.Eu não te entendo. / Eu não entendo você. /

Eu não entendo vocês.

I’ll help you people / you all / you both.Eu vou ajudar vocês / vocês todos / vocês dois.

OBJECT PRONOUNSecond Person Singular/Plural

OBJECT PRONOUNSecond Person Plural

For the second person, the personal pronoun used as the object pronoun is the same used as the subject pronoun: you. And it is used for both singular and plural. Therefore, the context tells us if you will be referring to singular or plural.

When we read these sentences, it’s not clear if we are using you to refer to one or to more people, that is, singular or plural. Especially because they are isolated sentences.

In spoken language, chances are the context will make it clear, since you is used to refer to the person or to the people you are talking to. Either way, you can make it clearer that you are using the plural form by combining you with other words, for example: you people, you all, or you both.

Mike’s son looks just like him.O filho do Mike se parece muito com ele.

(The object pronoun him refers to “Mike,” a male noun, and it’s the object of the sentence.)

My sister is an amazing person. I love to talk to her.Minha irmã é uma pessoa incrível. Eu adoro conversar com ela.

(We used the object pronoun her to replace the female noun “my sister.”)

OBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Singular (Him/Her)

The third person singular object pronouns used for people are: him for masculine and her for feminine. Both are used mostly for people.


I don’t understand this topic. I don’t understand it.Eu não entendo este tópico. Eu não entendo (isto).

I love chocolate cake. I love it.Eu adoro bolo de chocolate. Eu adoro (isso).

I’m watching this show. I’m watching it.Estou assistindo a este programa. Estou assistindo (a isto).

I’m going to the beach with my friends. I’m going to the beach with them.Estou indo à praia com meus amigos. Estou indo à praia com eles.

(The object is “my friends,” and it’s in the plural, so we could replace it with the object pronoun them.)

I don’t know those people. I don’t know them.Eu não conheço aquelas pessoas. Eu não as conheço. / Eu não conheço elas.

(To avoid repetition, we can replace the object “those people” for the object pronoun them.)

I like these shoes. I like them.Eu gosto destes sapatos. Eu gosto deles.

(The object of the sentence is “these shoes.” To avoid repetition, we can use the object pronoun them.)

OBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Singular (It)

OBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Plural (Them)

There’s still another third person singular object pronoun that is used for the other cases: the pronoun it. This personal pronoun will also have the same form when used as the subject or as the object pronoun.

In the third person plural, we’ll use they as the subject pronoun, and them as the object pronoun. In the plural, we will use the same pronoun to refer to people, places, objects, animals, or any other third person plural reference.

And now you know more about object pronouns.


There are usually two ways to make a statement:

1. By using the ACTIVE VOICE. In this case, we emphasize the doer of an action, which is the subject. Usando a voz ativa. Nestes casos, enfatizamos aquele que executa a ação, o sujeito.

Check the examples in the table to see how it works.

ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE

Active Voice

People speak Portuguese in Brazil.As pessoas falam português no Brasil.

(The focus is on the subject people, and Portuguese is the object.)(O foco está no sujeito “people” e “Portuguese” é o objeto.)

Passive Voice

Portuguese is spoken in Brazil (Portuguese = subject)Português é falado no Brasil.

(Portuguese is the subject of the sentence for we want to emphasize the language and not who speaks it.)(“Portuguese” é o sujeito da frase, porque queremos enfatizar o idioma, e não quem o fala.)

2. By using the PASSIVE VOICE. In such cases, we emphasize to the receiver of the action. The receiver in the active voice becomes the subject in the passive voice. Usando a voz passiva. Nestes casos, enfatizamos o receptor da ação. O receptor da voz ativa se transforma no sujeito da voz passiva.


Passive Voice

Active Voice

People speak Portuguese in Brazil.As pessoas falam português no Brasil.

(People = Subject of the Active Voice obligatory)

ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE

So, as we’ve seen, the object in the active voice becomes the subject of the passive voice. The subject of the active voice becomes the agent of the passive voice, and it can be left out of the sentence. If it is included, it is preceded by the preposition by.

Passive Voice

Portuguese is spoken by people in Brazil.Português é falado pelas pessoas no Brasil.

(By people = Agent of the Passive Voice optional)

In order to turn the active voice into the passive voice, there are some steps to be followed. Check them out in the table.

1. Use the object of the active voice as the subject of the passive voice.Use o objeto da voz ativa como o sujeito da voz passiva.

2. Include auxiliary verbs depending on the verb form.Inclua verbos auxiliares dependendo da forma verbal.

3. Include the verb TO BE as the auxiliary verb of the passive voice (use the same verb form as the main verb in the active voice).Inclua o verbo TO BE como verbo auxiliar da voz passiva (no mesmo tempo verbal do verbo principal).

4. Use the main verb of the active voice in the past participle.Use o verbo principal da voz ativa no particípio passado.

5. Include the agent of the passive (if necessary).Inclua o agente da passiva (se necessário).

6. Adverbs or adverbial phrases may be placed in the same position in both active and passive voices.Advérbios ou locuções adverbiais podem ser colocados na mesma posição tanto na voz ativa quanto na voz passiva.

ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE


Let’s see some examples of how we can turn active sentences into the passive voice.

Active Voice

Jane Austen probably wrote Pride and Prejudice in 1812.Jane Austen provavelmente escreveu Orgulho e preconceito em 1812.


Passive Voice

Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812.Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812.

Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812 by Jane Austin.Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812 por Jane Austin.

Let’s see an example of a sentence in which there are auxiliary verbs in the active voice.

Active Voice

My brother was painting my house on the weekend.Meu irmão estava pintando a minha casa no f im de semana.


Passive Voice

My house was being painted on the weekend.Minha casa estava sendo pintada no f im de semana.

My house was being painted by my brother on the weekend.Minha casa estava sendo pintada pelo meu irmão no f im de semana.

It’s important to notice that not every sentence in the active voice can be turned into the passive voice.

This happens when there is no object in the sentence or when the meaning would not be clear in the passive voice. Or it could be simply because the emphasis or focus intended by the speaker cannot be expressed by a passive structure.


Julia is a lovely girl.A Julia é uma menina adorável.

ACTIVE VOICE ONLY

Pompeii was rediscovered late in the 16th century.Pompeia foi redescoberta no f im do século XVI.

PASSIVE VOICEUses – The doer is irrelevant

The active voice is definitely the most frequent construction in communication. When the speaker chooses to move from the active voice to the passive voice, there is usually a reason for that. For example, if we consider that the doer of the action is irrelevant, we’ll go for the passive voice.

We studied together.Nós estudamos juntos.

Mary has two sons.Mary tem dois f ilhos.

The new drug wasn’t tested on animals.O novo remédio não foi testado em animais.

PASSIVE VOICEUses – Formal / Scientific contexts

In scientif ic contexts, the passive voice is commonly used.

My cell phone was stolen.O meu celular foi roubado.

PASSIVE VOICEUses – The doer is unknown

If the doer is unknown, we’ll also use the passive voice.

Now you know the difference between the active and passive voices, the structure of the passive voice and how to use it, as well as cases in which the passive voice can’t be used.


The past perfect is used to talk about an action that took place in the past before another past action happened. This verb form is often defined as “the past of the past.” That happens because the past perfect is used to talk about an event that happened any time before another past action.

Notice that there’s often more than one clause when we use the past perfect in a sentence: one in the past perfect and another one usually in the simple past.

PAST PERFECTAction in the Past Before Another Past Action

Josh had finished his homework when his mother arrived.O Josh tinha terminado o dever de casa quando sua mãe chegou.

1st Action (Past Perfect) – Josh had f inished his homework.2nd Action (Simple Past) – His mother arrived.

By the time the police arrived, the suspects had already escaped from the crime scene.No momento em que a polícia chegou, os suspeitos já tinham escapado da cena do crime.

1st Action (Past Perfect) – The suspects had escaped.2nd Action (Simple Past) – The police arrived.

The structure of the past perfect is similar to that of other perfect forms, that is: auxiliary verb have + main verb in the past participle. However, in the past perfect, the auxiliary verb be is used in the past, so have becomes had.


Past Perfect

InterrogativeHad + Subject + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Had Diana prepared dinner before she went to bed?Diana havia preparado o jantar antes de ir para a cama?

As we have seen in the examples, there is often more than one clause when we use the past perfect. But it does not necessarily have to be connected to another clause in the simple past in order to make sense. The oldest action can be made clear in the given context or by referring to a past date or event.

Let’s see some examples:

Maggie is in France now. She’s excited because she had never been there.A Maggie está na França agora. Ela está animada porque ela nunca tinha estado lá.

Emperor Vespasian had built the Coliseum before the second century.O imperador Vespasiano tinha construído o Coliseu antes do século II.

PAST PERFECTAction before a Specific Time in the Past

NegativeSubject + Had + Not + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Diana had not prepared dinner before she went to bed.Diana hadn’t prepared dinner before she went to bed.

Diana não havia preparado o jantar antes de ir para a cama.

It’s important to emphasize that the time reference relates to the most recent moment in the past, which means that the action in the past perfect took place any time before this past moment, whether it’s an event or a date that is setting the reference.

PAST PERFECT

AffirmativeSubject + Had + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Diana had prepared dinner before she went to bed.She’d prepared dinner before she went to bed.

Diana/Ela havia preparado o jantar antes de ir para a cama.


Now you know the structure and use of the past perfect.

The past perfect is also used in the third conditional.

If you had asked me, I would have given you the spare ticket.Se você tivesse me pedido, eu teria te dado o ingresso que sobrou.

1st action – Condition: Ask for the spare ticket2nd action – Result: Receive the ticket

PAST PERFECTThird Conditional

PAST PERFECTChanged States

Besides that, we can use the past perfect to emphasize situations that have changed its state.

Check out this dialogue:

LINDA: Are you doing anything tonight, Mia?Vai fazer alguma coisa hoje à noite, Mia?

MIA: Well, I had planned to go to a concert, but the tickets are sold out!Bem, eu tinha planejado ir a um show, mas os ingressos estão esgotados!


SubjectI/you/we/they

he/she/it

Auxilary Verb To Havehavehas

Main Verb: Past ParticipleRegular Verbs: add -D, -ED, or -IEDIrregular Verbs: follow no pattern

The present perfect is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or started in the past but are connected to the present, either by relevance or continuity. Its concept can be tricky, because not all languages have a specif ic verb form to f it this definition.

Let’s start by analyzing the structure of the present perfect. We mainly use the verb to have in the present as an auxiliary, that is, have (or has for the third person singular), and the main verb in the past participle.

The verb to have functions as an auxiliary verb in the structure of the present perfect. So, it’s important to recall its conjugation according to the subjects.

As for the main verb in the past participle, the general rule is that, for regular verbs in the past participle, we add -D, -ED, or -IED to the verb. And irregular verbs don’t follow a pattern. Go over the grammar guide dedicated to irregular verbs in the past participle.

PRESENT PERFECTSubject + Have + Past Participle + (Complement)


Present Perfect

For affirmative sentences, the structure is the subject followed by the verb to have in the present, then the main verb in the past participle, and the complement, if necessary. The verb to have is conjugated according to the subject.

For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary verb before the subject.

When you ask questions in the present perfect, it’s very common to use the adverb ever to ask if something has happened at any time before now.

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I’ve taken many English courses.Eu f iz muitos cursos de inglês.

(I’ve = I have; “taken” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to take”)

This place has been highly recommended.Esse lugar foi muito recomendado.

(“This place” = it; “been” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to be”)

Structure: Have/Has + Subject + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Have you found the book you were looking for?Você achou o livro que estava procurando?

(“found” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to f ind”)

Structure: Have/Has + Subject + Ever + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

Have you ever watched a soccer game at a stadium?Você já assistiu a um jogo de futebol em um estádio alguma vez?

(“watch” is the past participle of the regular verb “to watch”)

PRESENT PERFECTAffirmative Sentences

PRESENT PERFECTInterrogative Sentences


For negative sentences, we place the negative particle not after the auxiliary verb.

In the negative form, we can use the adverb never to express at no time and convey a negative meaning. However, we cannot use a double negative, so if we use never, the sentence will be made in the aff irmative structure, and the adverb will show that it’s a negative statement.

Now that we’ve seen the structures, let’s check the use. The main use of the present perfect is to talk about things that happened or started in the past but are connected to the present either by relevance or continuity.

Most of the time, it is the speaker’s choice to focus on the past action, using the simple past, or on the relevance it has to the present moment, choosing the present perfect.

Analyze the comparison of these two tenses in context.

PRESENT PERFECTNegative Sentences

SIMPLE PAST AND PRESENT PERFECT

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Not + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I haven’t seen snow.Eu não vi neve.

(haven’t = have not; “seen” is the past participle of the irregular verb “to see”)

Simple Past

The simple past focuses on the past event, and not on any eventual connection between this past action and the present moment.O simple past foca no evento passado, e não em alguma possível conexão que possa haver entre esse evento passado e o momento presente.

Last year, I traveled to Europe and visited many museums. It was an amazing trip.Ano passado, eu viajei para a Europa e visitei muitos museus. Foi uma viagem incrível.

(the focus is only on the past action)

Structure: Subject + Have/Has + Never + Main Verb (Past Participle) + Complement

I’ve never been to Paris.Eu nunca estive em Paris.

(Aff irmative Structure + Never = Negative Statement)


The game has begun.O jogo começou.

(It is happening right now and that is the focus)

The game began at 4 p.m.O jogo começou às 4h da tarde.

(The focus is on the information on when it started)

It’s important to notice that, when the speaker chooses to use the present perfect, the relevance of that past action to the present might be implicit in the context.

Another important thing: we never use the present perfect with time adverbs that refer to specific moments in the past, such as yesterday, last year, or last month. When we choose to use the present perfect, the focus is on the consequence, relevance, or continuity that a past action has in the present, so saying when it happened is unimportant and even wrong.

It doesn’t mean that you don’t know when it happened, but this is not what you want to highlight. Adverbs that refer to specif ic moments in the past are mostly used with the simple past or the past continuous.

There are other adverbs used with the present perfect that highlight its connection to the present either by relevance or continuity. When we use the present perfect to describe an action that is connected to the present by continuity, we frequently use the adverbs never or always or some adverbial phrases.

SIMPLE PAST AND PRESENT PERFECT

Present Perfect

The present perfect highlights that there is a connection between something that happened in the past and the present moment.O present perfect destaca que há uma conexão entre algo que aconteceu no passado e o momento presente

Visiting so many museums has changed my view of the world. I’ve learned a lot.Visitar tantos museus mudou a minha visão de mundo. Eu aprendi muito.

(The focus is on the relationship between a past action and present moment: I’m a different person now because of a past action)


Chris has lived in London his whole life.Chris morou em Londres a sua vida inteira.

(The action started when Chris was born and is still in progress)(A ação começou quando Chris nasceu e continua acontecendo)

Karen has known him for years.Karen o conhece há anos.

(Karen knew him in the past and knows him now)(Karen o conheceu no passado e o conhece até agora)

But they have never been in a serious relationship.Mas eles nunca tiveram um relacionamento sério.

(It did not happen in the past and still hasn’t happened in the present)(Não aconteceu no passado e continua sem ter acontecido no presente)

She’s always been in love with him.Ela sempre foi apaixonada por ele.

(She fell for him in the past and is still in love with him)(Ela se apaixonou por ele no passado e continua apaixonada no presente)

PRESENT PERFECT

Besides never and always, there are other adverbs of time commonly used with the present perfect. Check some examples:

PRESENT PERFECT AND ADVERBS OF TIME

EVER – any time before now (mostly in interrogative sentences)Alguma vez; já

ALREADY – happened earlier than expectedJá; antes do esperado

JUST – a short time before nowAcabei de...; há pouco tempo

YET – until nowAinda; até o momento


And now you know the structure and uses of the present perfect.

Have you ever seen snow?Você já viu neve alguma vez?

Come in. We have just started the meeting.Entre. Acabamos de começar a reunião.

I have already finished the report.Eu já terminei o relatório.

I haven’t met the new director yet.Eu não conheci o novo diretor ainda.

PRESENT PERFECT – ADVERBS

Check the following box to see some examples of adverbs used in present perfect sentences. Notice that we place the adverbs before the main verb, except for the adverb yet, which usually comes at the end of the sentence.


Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how. On this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the question word where.

Where is used to ask questions about place.

The question word where can be used in direct and indirect questions.

WhereOnde/Aonde

Where is the subway station?Onde é a estação de metrô?

(Direct Question: Where + Structure of the Interrogative Form)

I am asking you where the subway station is.Eu estou te perguntando onde f ica a estação de metrô.

(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)

QUESTION WORD - WHERE

QUESTION WORD – WHEREDirect and Indirect Questions

Direct questions with where will follow the same pattern, regardless of the verb form. The structure will be the question word where followed by the interrogative form.


Question Word - Where

Take a look at the structure to use where with the simple present. Note that when the main verb is the verb to be, there is no auxiliary verb. For all other verbs, the auxiliary is necessary.

SIMPLE PRESENT

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

Where are you?Onde você está?

Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where do you work? Where does she work? Onde você trabalha? Onde ela trabalha?

QUESTION WORD – WHEREWhere + Interrogative

Questions with where in the simple past follow the same pattern of the simple present. The only difference is that you’ll conjugate the verb to be or the auxiliary verb in the past

SIMPLE PAST

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)

Where were you?Onde você estava?

Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where did you go? Where did he go? Aonde você foi? Aonde ele foi?

QUESTION WORD – WHEREWhere + Interrogative


The question word where can also be used with continuous forms such as the present and the past continuous.

QUESTION WORD – WHEREContinuous Forms

Where + Interrogative Form

PRESENT AND PAST

Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where are you going?Aonde você está indo?

Where were you going last night when I arrived?Aonde você estava indo ontem à noite quando cheguei?

It is possible to use where with perfect forms such as the present perfect and the present perfect continuous.

PRESENT PERFECT

A past action that is still relevant. Uma ação passada que ainda é relevante.

Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject + Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)

Where have you been?Por onde você esteve?

QUESTION WORD – WHEREPerfect Forms

Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous


Modal verbs can be used in questions with where. In this case, the modal verb comes right after the question word.

Structure: Where + Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where should we go on our next vacation?Aonde devemos ir em nossas próximas férias?

(should = recommendation)

Where would you like to live?Onde você gostaria de viver?

(would = hypothetical question)

Where can we find an ATM machine?Onde podemos encontrar um caixa eletrônico?

(can = possibility)

QUESTION WORD – WHEREModal Verbs

PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS

Action started in the past and still going on.Ação iniciada no passado que ainda está acontecendo.

Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject + Been + Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)

Where have you been working?Onde você tem trabalhado?

In English, it is common to use where with verbs followed by prepositions that express directions. When we use these prepositions, they are placed right after the verb.

Two frequent prepositions used in questions with where are “to” and “from,” since they typically follow verbs that express movement.


And now you know what a question word is and how to use the question word where to ask indirect or direct questions with different verb forms.

Check out some questions with the verbs to go and to come followed by these prepositions.

Where are you going (to)?Para onde você está indo? / Aonde você está indo?

(The preposition is optional because the verb to go expresses movement toward a place with or without the preposition.)

(A preposição é opcional porque ir o verbo ir indica movimento em direção a algum lugar, com ou sem preposição.)

Where is she coming from?De onde ela está vindo?

(The preposition is mandatory, otherwise the verb to come might not imply the idea of origin.)(A preposição é obrigatória, caso contrário, o verbo vir pode não transmitir a ideia de origem.)

QUESTION WORD – WHEREWhere + Verbs Followed by Prepositions


Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. The question word who is used to ask questions about people.

Question Word—WhoDirect and Indirect Questions

Who is that girl?Quem é aquela garota?

(Direct question = who + structure of interrogative form)

As with all question words, the most frequent structure to ask a direct question is the question word followed by the interrogative form in different verb forms.

In the simple present, when we use who with the verb to be, we do not use an auxiliary verb.

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENTTo be

Who is your favorite singer?Quem é o seu cantor favorito?

(Simple Present + To be = No auxiliary)

Tell me who that girl is.Diga-me que é essa garota.

(Indirect question = who + structure of aff irmative form)


Question Word – Who

With all the other verbs in all other verb forms, we need to use an auxiliary verb in the interrogative form. But when we ask questions with the question word who, we have to pay special attention to this structure.

The question word who is always used to ask about the identif ication of a person. However, it is possible to ask about the subject or the object of the sentence. This is important because the structure of the question will change.

Take a look:

When we ask about the subject, the main verb is conjugated in third person singular. Pay attention to the structure of the interrogative sentence:

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENTQuestions about the subject

Structure: Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement

Who helps you with the kids?Quem te ajuda com as crianças?

(Who + verb in the third person singular “helps” + complement “you with the kids”)

My mom helps me with the kids.Minha mãe me ajuda com as crianças.

(Subject “my mom” + verb in the aff irmative “helps” + complement “me with the kids”)(The core of the answer is the subject “My mom.”)(A parte central da resposta é o sujeito “Minha mãe”.)

When we ask questions to learn about the object of a sentence, then the subject is included in the question, and we will use who followed by the structure of the interrogative form.

WHO – SIMPLE PRESENTQuestions about the object

Structure: Who + Structure of the Interrogative Form

Who do you want to win the elections?Quem você quer que vença as eleições?

(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary “do” + Subject “you” + Main Verb “want” + Complement)

I want Michael to win the elections.Eu quero que o Michael vença as eleições.

(Subject “I” + Verb in the Affirmative “want” + Object “Michael” + Complement “to win the elections”)(The core of the answer is the object “Michael.”)(A parte central da resposta é o objeto “Michael”.)


WHO – SIMPLE PASTSubject and Object Questions

Who was Anne Frank?Quem foi Anne Frank?(Who + Verb To Be)

Who called you?Quem te ligou?

(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)

Who did you call?Para quem você ligou?

(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb)

In the simple past, we follow the same pattern. The difference here is that the auxiliary verb in the past is did regardless of the subject.

As with the simple present, if we use the verb to be, we don’t use the auxiliary verb. We will use was or were, according to the subject.

WHO – CONTINUOUS FORMSPresent and Past Continuous

Who is driving today?Quem está dirigindo hoje?

(Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement)

Who were you talking to?Com quem você estava falando?

(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary + Subject + Main Verb)

In continuous forms such as the present and the past continuous, we’ll use the question word who followed by the interrogative of these structures.


With perfect forms, such as the present perfect and the present perfect continuous, we’ll use the same patterns.

WORD – PERFECT FORMSPresent Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous

Who has won the most Oscars?Quem ganhou mais Oscars?

(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)

Who have you been seeing?Com quem você tem saído?

(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary 1 + Subject + Auxiliary 2 + Main verb)

Who is commonly used with modal verbs. In this case, the modal comes right after the question word.

WHO – MODAL VERBS

Who should we consider for the project?Quem devemos considerar para o projeto?

Who can help us?Quem pode nos ajudar?

Who would you take to a desert island?Quem você levaria para uma ilha deserta?

You can make questions using who and verbs followed by prepositions. In these cases, the prepositions go to the end of the sentence.

WHOVerbs + Prepositions

Who are you going out with?Com quem você vai sair?

(I am asking about the person or people who are joining you.)

Who did you talk to?Com quem você falou?

(In this question, we want to know who that person is.)

And now you know when and how to use who, and you’ve seen its structure with different verb forms.


The question word whose is used to ask which person owns or is responsible for something, and it differs from the question word who, which is used to identify people, not ownership.

It is important to pay special attention to the difference between who’s, which is the contraction of the question word who and is, or sometimes who and has, and the question word whose. In spoken language, they may sound similar, but their meaning is different.

We can use two different structures to ask questions with whose. We can place the noun we are referring to right after the question word or keep it in its original interrogative position. Both questions have the same meaning.

WHO X WHOSE

WHO’S X WHOSE

WHOSE

Who is that girl?Quem é aquela menina?

That’s Mary.Aquela é a Mary

Who’s excited about the project?Quem está empolgado com o projeto?

(Who’s = Who + is.)

Whose is that girl?De quem é aquela menina?

She’s Meg’s daughter.Ela é f ilha da Meg.

Whose project is this?De quem é esse projeto?

(Whose = to whom the project belongs.)

Whose purse is this?De quem é essa bolsa?

Whose is this purse?De quem é essa bolsa?


Question Word Whose

WHOSE + PREPOSITIONS

WHOSESimple Forms

WHOSEContinuous Forms

At whose house are you having lunch?Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?

Whose house are you having lunch at?Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?

Whose car is parked in front of the house?De quem é o carro que está estacionado em frente à casa?

Whose car was parked in front of the house?De quem é o carro que estava estacionado em frente à casa?

Whose kid is running in the rain?De quem é a criança que está correndo na chuva?

Whose baby was crying earlier?De quem é o bebê que estava chorando mais cedo?

Depending on the verb and the speaker’s intention, we can also use whose with prepositions. They go either before the question word or at the end of the clause.

We can ask questions with whose using simple forms.

The question word whose can also be used in continuous forms.

As whose asks about possession, the answers will include the possessive case, possessive adjectives, or possessive pronouns. If you want to learn more about how to answer questions with

whose, there are dedicated grammar guides for each of these topics.


Relative pronouns are used to avoid repetitions, and they introduce relative clauses. There are several relative pronouns, but the way we use them to connect sentences is similar.

The relative pronoun who is used to refer to people. Imagine we know two pieces of information about Claire.

Notice that the subject in both sentences is Claire. Therefore, when we combine both sentences into one, we can replace the noun that is repeated, in this case, Claire, by the relative pronoun who, which is placed immediately after the noun it is replacing in the sentence.

We can start with the piece of information we want between commas.

1. Claire, who has been my friend since we were kids, is currently working as a consultant.

2. Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.

( 1 )Claire has been my friend since we were kids.

A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

( 2 )Claire is currently working as a consultant.

A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOPeople


Relative Pronouns

Notice that who refers to Claire, as it is replacing this term in the sentence that brings an additional piece of information.

Who can also refer to groups of people, such as committee, police, team, among others.

If the relative pronoun refers to things, for example, we’ll use the relative pronoun which. It won’t matter if it’s being used as the subject or the object of the verb in the sentence. Take a look:

( 1 )Claire has been my friend since we were kids.

A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

( 2 )Claire is currently working as a consultant.

A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.

(1) (2) (1)

Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.A Claire, que está atualmente trabalhando como consultora, é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.

If there’s a fire, you should call the fire brigade, who deals with this kind of accident.Se houver um incêndio, você deve chamar a brigada de incêndio, que lida com este tipo de acidente.

(Fire brigade consists of a group of people).

( 1 )Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.

O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.

( 2 )I don’t like soccer.

Eu não gosto de futebol.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOPeople

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOGroups of People

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHICHThings: Subject or Object


If we replace soccer for the relative pronoun in the sentence where it is the subject, the relative pronoun should be placed right after soccer in the sentence where it is the object, check it out:

But if we wish to replace it in the sentence where soccer is the object of the verb, it goes like:





(2) (1)

I don’t like soccer, which is the world’s most popular sport.Eu não gosto de futebol, que é o esporte mais popular do mundo.





(1) (2) (1)

Soccer, which I don’t like, is the world’s most popular sport.O futebol, do qual eu não gosto, é o esporte mais popular do mundo.




Notice that the relative pronoun which comes right after the noun it’s replacing.

Now that we have seen how to form sentences using the relative pronouns who and which, we have to take a closer look at the meaning of the sentences. Check the following pair of sentences, which contain a repetition:

We can join these sentences using the relative pronoun who with a coma right before it, or without a coma, depending on what we mean.

This not just a punctuation choice. There’s a considerable difference in meaning between these two sentences.

The one with a comma is a non-restrictive clause. That means, for example, that I only have one sister and my listener or reader knows that. So, I don’t need to specify which of my sisters I’m talking about. This is why I used the comma: because this is a non-restrictive clause, also called a non-defining clause. If I only have one sister, the fact that she is on vacation is only extra information.

( 1 )I’m going to travel with my sister.

Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã.

( 2 )My sister is on vacation.Minha irmã está de férias.

I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.

I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.

RELATIVE PRONOUNSNon-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause



The second sentence is known as restrictive or defining clause. Imagine I have three sisters and one of them is on vacation. If I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister,” I need to be more specif ic and define which of them I am talking about, so I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.” The clause with the relative pronoun defines which of my sisters is traveling with me.

It is important to identify restrictive and non-restrictive clauses because, as mentioned before, the meaning of sentences with restrictive or non-restrictive clauses is different. Besides that, we can replace the relative pronouns who and which with the relative pronoun that, but only in restrictive clauses.

Let’s use the same sentences we’ve seen before and check how we can do that:

I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.

(Non-restrictive clause: I only have one sister, so I don’t need to specify which sister I’m talking about).(Oração não restritiva: eu só tenho uma irmã, então, não preciso especif icar de qual irmã estou falando).

I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.

(Restrictive clause: I have three sisters and only one of them is on vacation).(Oração restritiva: Eu tenho três irmãs, e só uma delas está de férias).

Non-restrictive ClauseI’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.I’m going to travel with my sister, that is on vacation.

Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.

Restrictive ClauseI’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.I’m going to travel with my sister that is on vacation.

Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.


RELATIVE PRONOUN – THATRestrictive Clauses


Whenever that is used as a relative pronoun, there will never be a comma before it, because it can only be used in restrictive clauses. The relative pronoun that can replace either which or who, so it can refer to both people and things.

There are other relative pronouns, such as where and when. They’ll replace the adverb of place and the adverb of time respectively. But both of them can be replaced by preposition + which.

The same happens with the relative pronoun when. We can use it as a relative pronoun that gives a time reference, or as a preposition followed by which to convey the same meaning in a formal structure.

I know a great restaurant where we can eat.Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante onde nós podemos comer.

I know a great restaurant at which we can eat.Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante no qual nós podemos comer.

There isn’t a day when I don’t remember my childhood.Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.

There isn’t a day in which I don’t remember my childhood.Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHEREPlaces

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHENDates

Another important relative pronoun is whose. It is used to refer to possession by people, things, or animals. It will replace a repetition imposed by the genitive case or by possessive pronouns and adjectives. For example, let’s suppose we have these two pieces of information:

( 1 )Tina called me last night.

A Tina me ligou ontem à noite.

( 2 )Tina’s sister works with me.

A irmã da Tina trabalha comigo.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSEPossession


Now you know it’s possible to avoid repetition using relative pronouns in English.

We could put the sentences together by using the relative pronoun whose to indicate the fact that Tina has a sister that works with me. Notice that the apostrophe + S has been replaced with the relative pronoun whose to indicate possession.

(1) (2) (1)

Tina, whose sister works with me, called me last night.Tina, cuja irmã trabalha comigo, me ligou ontem à noite.

RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSEPossession


The simple past is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or existed in the past.

Check the structures, starting with aff irmative sentences in the past.

SIMPLE PASTAffirmative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Main Verb (in the Past) + Complement

I watched all the episodes of this series.Eu assisti a todos os episódios desta série.

(I performed this action in the past. It’s over now because I f inished it).

In affirmative sentences, the auxiliary verb is not necessary, but it can be used in some specif ic contexts to emphasize the message.

If we decide to use the auxiliary did to add emphasis to aff irmative sentences, the main verb goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PASTAffirmative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary Verb (in the Past) + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I did watch all the episodes of this series.Eu (de fato) assisti a todos os episódios desta série.

(Note that the auxiliary doesn’t have a meaning, only the function of emphasizing).


Simple Past – Other Verbs

The verb conjugation in the simple past will be the same for all persons, singular or plural. What we must take into consideration, though, is that some verbs in English are regular, while others are irregular.

In the previous example in the aff irmative form, we used the regular verb to watch in the past, which is watched.

For regular verbs, we’ll add -D, -ED, or -IED to the end, depending on how the base form is spelled. Check the spelling rules for regular verbs in the past.

SIMPLE PAST – REGULAR VERBSSpelling Rules

GENERAL RULE: ADD -ED

To watch – watched To play – played Assistir Brincar, jogar, tocar

VERBS ENDING IN -E: ADD -D

To like – liked To love – loved Gostar Amar

VERBS ENDING IN CONSONANT + -Y: DROP THE -Y AND ADD -IED

To study – studied To cry – cried Estudar Chorar

CVC VERBS: DOUBLE THE LAST CONSONANT AND ADD -ED

To stop – stopped To plan – planned Parar Planejar


These are the spelling rules for all regular verbs in the past, which are most verbs in English.

But there are few irregular verbs in English, and they do deserve some special attention. As the name says, they are irregular, which means there is not one pattern that applies to all of them.

For instance, some irregular verbs suffer signif icant changes in their base forms. That’s the case of the verb to be, which in the past becomes was or were depending on the subject, or the verb to have, which becomes had, and the verb to go, which becomes went. On the other hand, verbs such as to quit, to put, or to cut will keep their base form when conjugated in the past.

SIMPLE PASTIrregular Verbs

To be – was/wereSer, estar

To quit – quitDesistir

To have – hadTer

To cut – cutCortar

To go – wentIr

To put – putBotar, colocar

There’s a grammar guide dedicated to irregular verbs in the past. Check it so you can learn more about them.

Now, when using sentences in the negative and in the interrogative forms, the fact that the verbs can be either regular or irregular is unimportant, since it’s the auxiliary verb did that will be conjugated. This means that the main verb goes back to its base form.

SIMPLE PASTNegative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I didn’t watch this series.Eu não assisti a esta série.

(didn’t = did not)


The contracted form didn’t will be used in most cases. However, in formal written language, it is advisable to avoid the use of the contraction. In spoken language, if you use the full form, you are adding emphasis to a negative statement.

I did not watch this series.Eu não assisti a esta série.

SIMPLE PASTNegative Sentences – Adding Emphasis

For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary before the subject.

Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

Did you watch all the episodes of the final season?Você assistiu a todos os episódios da temporada f inal?

SIMPLE PASTInterrogative Sentences

Now that we’ve seen the simple past in the affirmative form and the spelling rules for regular verbs, as well as the structures of negative and interrogative sentences, it’s time to see its common usages.

We use the simple past to talk about definite time in the past.

I graduated in December.Eu me formei em dezembro.

(“To graduate” is a regular verb, and its past form is “graduated”)

We went to the movies yesterday.Nós fomos ao cinema ontem.

(“To go” is an irregular verb, and its past form is “went”)

SIMPLE PASTUses


The simple past may or may not have an explicit time reference. Either way, it refers to past events.

We can use the simple past to talk about events that happened once or events that happened with some frequency in the past.

Anne studied with me.A Anne estudou comigo.

(No time reference: but it’s still a f inished action in past)

Santos Dumont flew around the Eiffel Tower.Santos Dumont voou em volta da Torre Eiffel.

(No time reference: but it’s still a f inished action in past)

SIMPLE PASTUses

I went to Italy for my 15th birthday.Eu fui para a Itália no meu aniversário de 15 anos.

(The trip to Italy is an isolated event that happened because of my 15th birthday).

Every summer I traveled with my family to Italy.Todo verão eu viajava com minha família para a Itália.

(The trip to Italy was something that happened more frequently, every summer.)

SIMPLE PASTUses


When we want to make it clearer that we are talking about a past habit, something that happened frequently in the past, it’s also possible to use the expression used to followed by a main verb.

Structure: Subject + Used to + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement

I used to travel to Italy every summer.Eu costumava viajar para a Itália todo verão.

(Used to + Main Verb in the Base Form = frequent events or habits in the past)

USED TOFrequent Events in the Past

Now you know when and why we use the simple past with other verbs, as well as its structures and spelling rules.



The simple past is used to talk about an event that happened in the past. The time it occurred may be given or not, but it refers to an event that happened in the past.

In this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the verb to be in the past. First, it’s important to know that the verb to be is an irregular verb, and it’s the only verb in English that has two irregular conjugations for the simple past depending on the person: was and were.

Check the structures for interrogative, negative, and aff irmative sentences.

The basic structure for affirmative sentences is the SVC structure, that is, the subject, the verb to be in the past, and the complement.

Singular Plural Verb (To Be) Verb (To Be)

I was we were you were you were

he/she/it was they were seu(s), sua(s), dela seus, suas, deles, delas

Structure: Subject + Verb + Complement

I was in Los Angeles last week.Eu estava em Los Angeles na semana passada.

(Subject “I” + Verb in the Simple Past “was” + Complement “in Los Angeles last week”)

We were at the annual conference.Nós estávamos na conferência anual.

(Subject “we” + Verb in the Simple Past “were” + Complement “at the annual conference”)

SIMPLE PASTVerb To Be

SIMPLE PAST – TO BEAffirmative Sentences

Second person

Third person

First person


Simple Past - To Be


To make a negative statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. It is very common to see the contracted forms, which are, wasn’t for was not, and weren’t for were not.

In the simple past, you’ll only see contracted or short forms in negative sentences. Short forms are very common in everyday situations. However, if you want to sound more formal or more emphatic, use the full form.

In interrogative sentences, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.

SIMPLE PAST – TO BENegative Sentences

SIMPLE PAST – TO BEInterrogative Sentences

Structure: Subject + Verb + NOT + Complement

I wasn’t home when he arrived.Eu não estava em casa quando ele chegou.

(wasn’t = was not)

We weren’t in Rio last summer.Nós não estávamos no Rio no verão passado.

(weren’t = were not)

Structure: Verb + Subject + Complement

Were you home last night?Você estava em casa ontem à noite?

Was Meg with you?A Meg estava com você?



I was sad because I failed the exam.Eu estava triste porque não passei na prova.

(I was feeling that way, but I am not anymore).

AgeI was 40 years old when my son was born.Eu tinha 40 anos quando o meu f ilho nasceu.

(I am not 40 anymore. I was 40 at the time of that specif ic event—the day my son was born).

I was so thirsty.Eu estava com muita sede.

(I am referring to a past state. I probably had water, and I am not thirsty anymore).

ProfessionI was a teacher.

Eu era professor(a).(I was a teacher. I may have retired or I changed my profession).

Marital StatusI was married.

Eu era casado(a).(Since it is in past, it means I am not married anymore. I may be divorced or have become a widow/widower).

I was skinnier.Eu era mais magro(a).

(It was how I looked in the past, but I’ve changed).

SIMPLE PAST – TO BEUses


Let’s now check some possible uses of the verb to be in the simple past.

To Be is used to refer to past physical conditions or states.

We can talk about a past age, profession, or marital status.



We were friends.Nós éramos amigos.

(We are not that close anymore, maybe we don’t see each other as often as we used to).

He was my boyfriend.Ele era meu namorado.

(We broke up and he is not my boyfriend anymore. He is my ex now).

It was about 8 a.m. when she left.Eram cerca de 8 horas da manhã quando ela saiu.

Our last appointment was on January 3rd.A nossa última consulta foi no dia 3 de janeiro.



We can use the verb to be in the past to talk about past relationships.

We can also use the verb to be in the past to talk about past time and dates.



Meg was at the mall with me.A Meg estava no shopping comigo.

(I am mentioning the place where Meg and I were).

My office was on Fifth avenue.Meu escritório f icava na 5ª avenida.

(I am talking about a past location—it’s not there anymore. I may have moved to another off ice).


And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple past, as well as its structure and the contracted form for negative sentences.

We can use the verb to be in the past to refer to places and locations in the past.


281

Verb To Be Other Verbs

Interrogative Is she a teacher? Does she work as a teacher? Ela é professora? Ela trabalha como professora?

Negative She isn’t a teacher. She doesn’t work as a teacher. Ela não é professora. Ela não trabalha como professora.

The simple present was divided into two grammar guides, and we did that because there is an important difference in structure.

In this grammar guide, we’ll talk about the simple present with verbs that are not the verb to be, that is, all the other verbs.

When we use the verb to be, we do not use an auxiliary verb to make interrogative and negative sentences. But when we use other verbs, we need to use the auxiliary verb. The auxiliary verb for the simple present is do or does, according to the subject.

Check out the difference in the box.

SIMPLE PRESENT

The basic structure for the aff irmative form is the SVC structure, that is, subject, main verb, and complement. And the verb conjugation works like this: we’ll use the base form of the verb for all persons, except for the third person singular. In this case, we’ll add –S, –ES, or –IES to the end of the verb, depending on how it’s spelled.


Simple Present -Other Verbs

282

Usage of the Auxiliary Do

I do have the right to speak my mind.Eu tenho (sim) o direito de dar minha opinião.

(The verb “do” is used as an auxiliary. So it does not have a meaning, but a function). (O verbo “do” é usado como auxiliar. Portanto, não tem um signif icado, mas uma função).

If you want to learn more about the third person spelling rules, you can check the grammar guide on this topic. However, most verbs will only take a final S in the third person singular, as you can see in the following table.

SIMPLE PRESENTAffirmative Form: Adding Emphasis

Notice that we do not use the auxiliary verb in the affirmative form. But it’s possible to use it to add emphasis to a statement. In that case, the auxiliary verb is placed before the main verb.

Singular Plural

I work here. We work here. Eu trabalho aqui. Nós trabalhamos aqui.

You work here. You work here. Você trabalha aqui. Vocês trabalham aqui.

He works here. Ele trabalha aqui.

She works here. They work here. Ela trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas trabalham aqui.

It works for now. Isso funciona por enquanto.

SIMPLE PRESENTAffirmative Form

Second person

Third person

First person


283

Thus, it is possible to use the auxiliary with the simple present in the aff irmative form, but it’s also important to notice that it adds emphasis to the sentence, which means that it is only going to happen in very specif ic contexts.

As for the negative and interrogative forms, the auxiliary do is not optional, it’s necessary.

The basic structure for the negative form is the subject, the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to the subject, the negative particle not, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.

You should pay close attention to the third person singular. In both negative and interrogative forms, the conjugation goes in the auxiliary verb, that is, we will use does, and, because of that, the main verb goes back to its base form.

Singular Plural

I don’t work here. We don’t work here. Eu não trabalho aqui. Nós não trabalhamos aqui.

You don’t work here. You don’t work here. Você não trabalha aqui. Vocês não trabalham aqui.

He doesn’t work here. Ele não trabalha aqui.

She doesn’t work here. They don’t work here. Ela não trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas não trabalham aqui.

It doesn’t work for now. (Isso) não funciona por enquanto.

SIMPLE PRESENTNegative Form

Second person

Third person

First person

Do Not Use the Contracted Form

You do not have the right to shout at people.Você não tem o direito de gritar com as pessoas.

SIMPLE PRESENTNegative Form: Adding Emphasis

In informal language, the contracted forms don’t (do + not) or doesn’t (does + not) are used in most cases. In formal written language, we avoid using contractions.

On the other hand, in spoken language, if we use the full form, it probably means we want to add emphasis to a negative statement.


284

I work at a law firm.Eu trabalho em um escritório de advocacia.

She works a lot.Ela trabalha muito.

SIMPLE PRESENTOther Verbs – Uses

The simple present is used to talk about facts and to show repetitions, habits, or generalizations.

The basic interrogative form structure in the simple present is the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to the subject, the subject, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.

So the position of the auxiliary verb and the subject is inverted, and, once again, in the third person singular, the main verb goes back to its base form, and the auxiliary verb is conjugated.

Check out the following table:

Singular Plural

Do I work here? Do we work here? Eu trabalho aqui? Nós trabalhamos aqui?

Do you work here? Do you work here? Você trabalha aqui? Vocês trabalham aqui?

Does he work here? Ele trabalha aqui?

Does she work here? Do they work here? Ela trabalha aqui? Eles/Elas trabalham aqui?

Does it work for now? Isso funciona por enquanto?

SIMPLE PRESENTInterrogative Form

Second person

Third person

First person


285

She crosses the street toward him, looks back, and decides to let it go.Ela atravessa a rua em direção a ele, olha para trás e decide deixar para lá.

He gets the ball, passes through the defense and shoots, but the goalkeeper saves it.Ele pega a bola, passa pela defesa e chuta, mas o goleiro agarra.

Firefighters save many lives in Brooklyn.Os bombeiros salvam muitas vidas no Brooklyn.


The simple present can convey the idea of immediacy and drama, and that’s why it’s commonly used in stories or novels, in sports broadcasting, and in newspaper headlines, even when reporting past events.

It can also be used to present a series of events when we narrate something or give instructions and directions.

First you read the questions, then you have to mark the correct statement.Primeiro você lê as perguntas, depois você tem que marcar a afirmação correta.

You go straight and turn right on the traffic light.Você segue em frente e vira à direita no semáforo.



286

In English, some verbs cannot be used in continuous forms. These verbs are called non-progressive verbs, and we use them in the simple present. This group is divided into different subgroups of verbs.

Mental process verbs

know, suppose, think, understandsaber, supor, achar, entender

Verbs that describe senses

smell, taste, hearsentir cheiro, sentir sabor, ouvir

Verbs that express feelings

admire, adore, hate, like, respectadmirar, adorar, detestar, gostar, respeitar

Speech act verbs

promise, swear, agree, denyprometer, jurar, concordar, negar

SIMPLE PRESENTNon-progressive Verbs

And now you know the structure and the most common uses of the simple present.


287

The simple present is used to talk about factual information or things that happen regularly.

SIMPLE PRESENT

This wall is white.Esta parede é branca.

(It’s a factual piece of information.)

I sleep for 8 or 9 hours a day.Eu durmo de 8 a 9 horas por dia.

(It’s part of a routine, something I do every day.)

The simple present will be tackled in two different grammar guides. In this one, we’ll focus on the simple present sentences in which the main verb is the verb to be.

Check the following table to see the conjugation of the verb to be in the simple present.

SIMPLE PRESENTVerb To Be

Singular PluralFirst person I am We areSecond person You are You areThird person He/She/It is They are


Simple Present -Verb To Be

288

There is a different sentence structure for the interrogative, negative, and affirmative forms. In affirmative sentences, we’ll frequently use the SVC structure, that is, Subject, Verb, and Complement. To make a negative statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. And to ask a question, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.

AffirmativeSubject + Verb To Be + Complement

I’m a writer.Eu sou escritor.

NegativeSubject + Verb To Be + NOT + Complement

I am not a writer.Eu não sou escritor.

InterrogativeVerb To Be + Subject + Complement

Are you a writer?Você é escritor?

Affirmative Negative I’m I’m not You’re You aren’t He’s/She’s/It’s He/She/It isn’t We’re We aren’t They’re They aren’t

SIMPLE PRESENTVerb To Be

SIMPLE PRESENTVerb To Be – Contracted Form

The simple present of the verb to be is commonly used in its contracted form, also known as short form. Contractions are considered informal, and they are very common in everyday situations. However, if you want to sound more formal or more emphatic, use the full form.

The short or contracted forms can be used in affirmative or negative sentences.


289

Now that you know the conjugation in the plural and singular forms, its structure for aff irmative, negative, and interrogative sentences, as well as its full and contracted forms, check out the possible uses of the verb to be in the simple present.

It can be used to refer to personal information such as name, age, profession, marital status, and nationality.

I am thirsty.Eu estou com sede.

(It’s a state. Something I am experiencing now.)

I am skinny.Eu sou magro(a).

(It refers to a physical characteristic.)

SIMPLE PRESENTVerb To Be – Uses


We can also use the verb to be followed by an adjective to talk about permanent or temporary physical characteristics and feelings.

AgeI am 36 years old.Eu tenho 36 anos.

ProfessionI am an architect.Eu sou arquiteta.

NameI am Sophie.

Eu sou Sophie.My name is Sophie.

O meu nome é Sophie.

NationalityI am French.

Eu sou francesa.

Marital StatusI am single.

Eu sou solteira.


290

The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about permanent or temporary qualities or states, personal characteristics, or mood.

I am stressed.Eu estou estressado(a).

(It’s a current mood or a temporary state.)

I am a stressed person.Eu sou uma pessoa estressada.

(It’s part of my personality.)

It’s eleven o’clock.São onze horas.

Our meeting is on December 3rd.A nossa reunião é no dia 3 de dezembro.



The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about time and dates.

We can use the verb to be in the simple present to refer to places and locations as well.

I am at the mall.Eu estou no shopping.

The 9/11 Memorial is in Manhattan.O memorial do 11 de Setembro é em Manhattan.


And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple present.


There are spelling rules for the -ING form in English, which means that the way we write the verbs will change according to certain rules.

The general rule for the -ING form is that you just add the suff ix -ING.

There are also some special cases. If the verb ends in an E, drop the E and add -ING.

watch watching assistir assitindo

do doing fazer fazendo

Verbs ending in -E Drop the -E and add -ING

take taking pegar; levar pegando; levando

make making fazer fazendo

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMSGeneral Rule – Add -ING.

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMSSpecial Cases

Spelling Rules – -ING Forms


When the verb has one syllable and ends in CVC, that means, consonant plus vowel plus consonant, we will usually double the last consonant and add -ING.

One-syllable verbs Double the last consonant ending in CVC and add -ING

run running correr correndo

get getting pegar pegando

swim swimming nadar nadando


However, if the one-syllable verb that ends in CVC finishes in W, X, or Y, there will be no double consonant, we will just add -ING.

CVC ending in Y, W, and X Add -ING

enjoy enjoying gostar; aproveitar gostando; aproveitando

show showing mostrar mostrando

fix fixing consertar consertando



In the case of two-syllable verbs ending in CVC, there are two rules.

If they end in a stressed syllable, we’ll double the last consonant and add -ING. If the last syllable is unstressed, we’ll just add -ING.

Last syllable is stressed

commit committing (se comprometer) (se comprometendo)

Last syllable is unstressed

whisper whispering (sussurrar) (sussurrando)

SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMSTwo-syllable Verbs Ending in CVC

For the verbs ending in IE, we replace IE with Y and add -ING.

Ending in IE Change IE for Y and add -ING die dying morrer morrendo

lie lying mentir mentindo

tie tying amarrar amarrando


Now you know the spelling rules for the -ING forms.


Subject pronouns are personal pronouns that replace nouns that work as the subject of the sentence. Let’s take a look at them:

First person pronouns are the ones used to refer to the person speaking; second person pronouns refer to the person we are talking to; and third person pronouns, to the people or objects we are talking about.

Let’s start analyzing the f irst person pronouns, the ones that refer to the person who is talking.

The first person singular pronoun (I) is always written with a capital letter, regardless of its position in the sentence. Capitalization does not happen with any other pronoun in English, not even with the first person plural (we).

SUBJECT PRONOUNS

Singular Plural

I we eu nós you you tu/você vós/vocês

he ele (pessoa)

she they ela (pessoa) eles/elas

it ele/ela (exceto pessoas)

Second person

Third person

First person


Subject Pronouns

For the second person, the subject pronoun you will be used both in the singular and in the plural. You always refers to the person or the people you are talking to. Therefore, the context will tell you whether it is singular or plural.

SUBJECT PRONOUNSFirst Person

SUBJECT PRONOUNSSecond Person

You are a teacher.Você é professor.

(second person singular pronoun you)

You are teachers.Vocês são professores.

(second person plural pronoun you)

I am her friend.Eu sou amigo(a) dela.

(f irst person singular pronoun I)

Karen and I work at the same company.Karen e eu trabalhamos na mesma empresa.

(f irst person singular pronoun I)

We are friends.Nós somos amigos.

(f irst person plural pronoun we)

That was the moment we decided to quit the job.Foi nesse momento que nós decidimos deixar o emprego.

(f irst person plural pronoun we)


John is a teacher. He is very good.O John é professor. Ele é muito bom.

(third person singular masculine pronoun he)

Sarah is an actress. She is great.A Sarah é atriz. Ela é ótima.

(third person singular feminine pronoun she)

Turn off the computer. It’s too hot.Desligue o computador. Ele está muito quente.

(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

Turn the TV down. It’s loud.Abaixe a televisão. Ela está alta.

(third person singular neutral pronoun it)

The third person is used to refer to the people or objects we are talking about. In the third person singular, there are two pronouns used to refer to people, and, in some cases, to pets: he and she. “He” is used for the masculine; and “she,” for the feminine.

For all the other cases, we will use the other third person singular pronoun, it; that is, to talk about any other thing in the singular.

Notice that, in the examples we have just seen, the reference of the pronoun it is clear in the sentence. It refers to the computer in the f irst example, and to the TV in the second one.

But the pronoun it will also be used as a subject in sentences that have an impersonal subject. This impersonal use of it introduces new information, and it is used particularly to talk about time, dates, the weather, and opinion.

When it has an impersonal function, it does not refer to a previously mentioned noun. In this case, the pronoun it simply works as the subject of the sentence.

SUBJECT PRONOUNSThird Person Singular (He/She)

SUBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Singular (It)


It’s a pleasure to be here.É um prazer estar aqui.

(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)

They are good teachers.Elas são boas professoras.

(third person plural pronoun they)

It’s hot today.Está quente hoje.


They are great students.Eles são ótimos alunos.


It’s late.Está tarde.


They are good books.São bons livros.


SUBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Singular (It)

SUBJECT PRONOUNThird Person Plural (They)

And now you know how to use subject pronouns in English.

Take a look at the following examples:

For the third person plural, there is only one pronoun: they. This is the plural form of the pronouns he, she, and it—meaning this pronoun can be used to refer both to people and objects.


Tag questions are small questions that come at the end of a statement. They usually work as a way to ask for confirmation or agreement. Tag questions are mostly used in spoken language, but they are also common in informal written language.

TAG QUESTIONS

A question at the end of a sentence used to confirm the information previously mentioned.Uma pergunta ao f inal de uma frase para confirmar a informação anterior.

Jonas has two kids, doesn’t he?O Jonas tem dois f ilhos, não tem?

The game is not today, is it?O jogo não é hoje, é?

You don’t like salmon, do you?Você não gosta de salmão, gosta?

I sent you the report, didn’t I?Eu te mandei o relatório, não mandei?

Mary is not on vacation, is she?Mary não está de férias, está?

The meeting is tomorrow, isn’t it?A reunião é amanhã, não é?

Examples

Tag questions can be used in the affirmative and negative, but they are not used with interrogative sentences because they already are questions.

If the main sentence is affirmative, you’ll use the tag question in the negative. And when the main sentence is in the negative form, the tag question is in the affirmative.

TAG QUESTION

Main Sentence Tag Question Affirmative Negative: Auxiliary Verb + Not + Subject

Negative Affirmative: Auxiliary Verb + Subject

Interrogative Not Possible to Use Tag Questions


Tag Questions

Take a closer look at the structure.

TAG QUESTIONGeneral Rule

Jonas has two kids, doesn’t he?O Jonas tem dois f ilhos, não tem?

(Main sentence in the aff irmative simple present = auxiliary is not necessary)(Tag question = a question in the simple present, so the auxiliary (do or does) is necessary)

I sent you the report, didn’t I?Eu te mandei o relatório, não mandei?

(Main sentence in the aff irmative simple past = auxiliary is not necessary)(Tag question = a question in the simple past, so the auxiliary (did) is necessary)

You don’t like salmon, do you?Você não gosta de salmão, gosta?

(Main sentence in the negative simple present = auxiliary is necessary)(Tag question = a question in the simple present, so the auxiliary (do) is necessary)

This is the structure we’ll use for tag questions with all verb forms, including modal verbs. But there are some exceptions to this rule.

The f irst one is when the verb to be is the main verb and it’s used either in the simple present or in the simple past. Remember that the verb to be does not require the use of an auxiliary verb when in the simple present or past. We’ll form the tag question by using the verb to be and the subject.

Pay extra attention to tag questions in the first person singular with the verb to be. In this case, the common and informal question is “aren’t I?” However, it is possible to use “am I not?” in very specif ic and formal contexts.

TAG QUESTIONVerb To Be: Simple Present And Simple Past

The game is not today, is it?O jogo não é hoje, é?

The meeting was yesterday, wasn’t it?A reunião foi ontem, não foi?

I’m late for the meeting, aren’t I?Eu estou atrasado para a reunião, não estou?

I’m right. Am I not?Estou certa. Não estou?


There’s still another important exception: the imperative form. The imperative does not have an interrogative form. It’s only used in the aff irmative and negative. When we use an imperative sentence to tell or to ask people to do something, it’s possible to use tag questions to soften your request.

Tag questions for imperative sentences are most frequently formed with will in the aff irmative form, even if the main statement is also in the aff irmative form.

The difference from the other tag questions is that, in the imperative form, if the main sentence is in the aff irmative, the tag question will also be in the aff irmative. We use “will you?” as a tag question for imperative sentences both in the affirmative and in the negative.

TAG QUESTIONSImperatives

Pass me the salt, will you?Me passa o sal, pode ser?

Give me a hand, will you?Me dá uma mãozinha, pode ser?

Don’t forget to bring the books, will you?Não se esqueça de trazer os livros, pode ser?

So, the tag “will you?” can be used with most imperative sentences, no matter if they are aff irmative or negative. But not with imperative sentences using “let’s”. In this case, we’ll use the tag “shall we?”

TAG QUESTIONSImperatives – Let’s

Let’s go, shall we?Vamos?

Let’s start the meeting, shall we?Vamos começar a reunião?

And now you know the use and structure of tag questions.


Used to is similar in meaning to “be accustomed to” or “to be familiar with” in some contexts. In general, it refers to habits. However, in English, used to is more frequently used than “accustomed to.”

We use the structure used to followed by a verb in its base form when we want to refer to a past habit; something we did regularly in the past, but we don’t do anymore.

In the affirmative form, the general structure is: Subject + Used to + Main Verb in its base form + Complement.

In the negative and interrogative forms, we’ll use the structure of the simple past.

USED TOStructure

Affirmative FormSubject + Used To + Verb (Base Form) + ComplementSujeito + Used To + Verbo (Forma Base) + Complemento

Negative FormSubject + Did Not (Didn’t) + Used To + Verb (Base Form) + ComplementSujeito + Did Not (Didn’t) + Use To + Verbo (Forma Base) + Complemento

Interrogative FormDid + Subject + Used To + Verb (Base Form) + ComplementDid + Sujeito + Use To + Verbo (Forma Base) + Complemento


Used To

Check some examples in the aff irmative, negative, and interrogative forms.

My father used to read bedtime stories to me when I was little.Meu pai costumava contar histórias para eu dormir quando eu era pequeno.

Tom didn’t use to like broccoli when he was younger.O Tom não gostava de brócolis quando ele era mais novo.

Did you use to play volleyball at college?Você jogava / costumava jogar vôlei na faculdade?

USED TOPast habits

We can use the structure USED TO + VERB in its base form to talk about habitual actions or states in the past. But it’s always important to notice that it’s something that does not happen or is not true anymore.forms.

Referring to actions that happened regularly in the past but NOT anymore

I used to take my brother to school in the mornings.Eu levava / costuma levar meu irmão para escola de manhã.

USED TO + VERBPast Habits – Actions or States

Referring to states that were true in past but NOT anymore

He used to be a shy little boy.Ele era um menininho tímido.


The modal verb would can also be used to refer to actions or events that happened regularly in the past. But it is only used with action verbs, and it is not possible to use it when we are referring to past states.

Besides talking about past habits, it’s important to remember that the modal verb would also has other functions and meanings in English. So, we must always consider the context in which it’s being used. If you want to learn more about this modal verb, you can check the grammar guide about it.

In the following table you can see some examples in which would means the same as used to.

USED TO AND WOULDPast Habits – Action Verbs

USED TOMom used to cook my favorite dish on my birthdays.

Mamãe costumava preparar meu prato favorito no meu aniversário.

WOULDMom would cook my favorite dish on my birthdays.

Mamãe costumava preparar meu prato favorito no meu aniversário.

There are other possible constructions with used to.

We can use the verb to be in the simple past or in the simple present, followed by used to and a complement. Or we can use Be + USED TO and Verb in the -ING form if the structure is immediately followed by a verb.

This structure can be used to talk about past habits or present habits, depending on the verb form of the verb to be.

USED TO(be accustomed to / be familiar with)

Structure: Be + Used to + Complement

The students were used to Ms. Bianchi’s accent. She was from Italy.Os alunos estavam acostumados com o sotaque da senhora Bianchi.

Ela era da Itália.


Now you know how and when to use the structure used to.

Now, if we want to talk about a present habit, we need to use the verb to be in the present followed by used to; it is very likely that there will be a verb in the -ING form, and the meaning is also to be accustomed to something.

USED TO(be accustomed to)

Structure: Be + Used To + Verb in the –ING Form

Andrew is used to working long hours. He’s a doctor.Andrew está acostumado a trabalhar muitas horas.

Ele é médico.

I’m not used to staying awake for so long. I need to sleep.Eu não estou acostumado a f icar acordado por tanto tempo.

Eu preciso dormir.

If we want to emphasize the process of acquiring a new habit, we can replace the verb to be in this structure with the verb to get, and use it followed by a verb in the -ING form or by a complement.

USED TOGet + Used To

Amy has just moved to another town. She will have to get used to living away from her parents.

Amy acabou de mudar-se para outra cidade. Ela vai ter que se acostumar a morar longe dos pais.

She’ll have to get used to that.Ela vai ter que se acostumar a isso.


Agreeconcordar

Haveter

Planplanejar

Decidedecidir

Needprecisar

Wantquerer

Sometimes, the complement of a verb may be another verb. In these cases, the second verb will either appear in the infinitive or in the -ING form, depending on the situation.

It’s important to know that because some verbs will only take the infinitive form, others will only take the -ING form, and some others will take both the infinitive and -ING forms.

Check some verbs that are commonly followed by the to-infinitive form.

VERBS + TO-INFINITIVE

Now, check some sentences in which the f irst verb is commonly followed by the second verb in the infinitive.

I’m planning to visit my parents on the holiday season.Eu estou planejando visitar meus pais na época dos feriados.

(Verb to plan in the present continuous + verb to visit in the infinitive)

Mary wants to buy a new car.Mary quer comprar um carro novo.

(Verb to want in the simple present + verb to buy in the infinitive)

I had to leave earlier yesterday.Eu tive que sair mais cedo ontem.

(Verb to have in the simple past + verb to leave in the infinitive)

VERBS + TO-INFINITIVE


Verbs + Infinitive or -ING

On the other hand, some verbs can only be followed by the -ING form.

Check some examples.

Most verbs formed with prepositions, such as keep on and give up, will also be followed by the -ING form.

Emily enjoys watching cult movies on the weekends.Emily gosta de assistir f ilmes cult nos f inais de semana.

(Verb to enjoy in the simple present + verb to watch in the –ING form)

People should avoid smoking near children.As pessoas deveriam evitar fumar perto de crianças.

(Verb to avoid in the bare inf initive (after a modal verb) + verb to smoke in the –ING form)

Anna should consider coming to her mother’s house at Christmas.Anna deveria considerar vir para a casa da sua mãe no Natal.

(Verb to consider in the bare inf initive (after a modal verb) + verb to come in the –ING form)

Activists keep on asking the authorities to protect the environment.Ativistas continuam pedindo às autoridades que protejam o meio ambiente.

Nancy gave up trying to convince Bob to come along.A Nancy desistiu de tentar convencer o Bob a vir junto.

VERBS + -ING

VERBS + -ING

VERB + -ING

Admitadmitir

Considerconsiderar

Mindimportar-se / tomar cuidado / prestar atenção

Avoidevitar

Enjoycurtir/aproveitar

Riskarriscar


And there’s another group of verbs that can be followed either by the infinitive or the -ING form. But we should divide them into two subgroups.

Verbs such as hate, love, like, and prefer may be followed either by the infinitive or the -ING form, with no difference in meaning.


Notice that if this same group of verbs is accompanied by the modal verbs would or should, then only the infinitive form is acceptable.

Joyce hates driving when it’s raining.Joyce hates to drive when it’s raining.

Joyce detesta dirigir quando está chovendo.

Henry loves cooking breakfast for his kids.Henry loves to cook breakfast for his kids.

Henry ama preparar o café da manhã para seus f ilhos.

Sharon would like to travel on the holiday.Sharon would like traveling on the holiday.

Sharon gostaria de viajar no feriado.

VERBS + INFINITIVE OR -ING

VERB + INFINITIVE OR -ING

WOULD/SHOULD + VERB + INFINITIVE

Hateodiar

Loveamar/adorar

Likegostar

Preferpreferir


Now, other verbs such as: forget, remember, stop, and try can be followed either by the infinitive or the -ING form, but with a significant change in meaning.


Karen stopped smoking.Karen parou de fumar.

(Stop + -ING form She quit smoking; Karen doesn’t smoke anymore.)

Karen stopped to smoke.Karen parou para fumar.

(Stop + infinitive She interrupted something in order to smoke.)

I asked John, and he remembers turning off the lights before he left.Eu perguntei ao John, e ele se lembra de ter apagado as luzes antes de sair.(Remember + -ING form He remembers something he did in the past.)

John, remember to turn off the lights before you leave.John, lembre-se de apagar as luzes antes de sair.

(Remember + infinitive It’s a warning so that he does not forget to do something)

VERBS + INFINITIVE OR -ING

VERB + INFINITIVE / -ING

Forgetesquecer

Stopparar

Rememberlembrar

Trytentar


There are still some special cases that should be pointed out.

Verbs such as let and make are followed by the bare infinitive, that is, the infinitive form without the particle to. And there will always be an object before the infinitive.

The verb help can also follow this structure. But notice that, sometimes, you will see this verb followed by the bare infinitive, and some others, by the to-infinitive.

Your classmate is going to help you prepare the task.Your classmate is going to help you to prepare the task.

Seu colega de turma vai te ajudar a preparar a tarefa.

Let George do that for you.Let him do that for you.

Deixe o George fazer isso por você.Deixe-o fazer isso por você.

Paul made me wait for two hours.Paul me fez esperar por duas horas.

HELP + INFINITIVE

VERB + INFINITIVE WITHOUT TO

So now you know how to use the infinitive or the -ING form after verbs.


310

The modal verb will is mostly used to refer to the future. As all modal verbs, it functions as an auxiliary verb, adding meaning to the main verb.

Check the structures for the aff irmative, interrogative, and negative forms.

WILLStructure

Affirmative

She will go to college next year.Ela vai para a faculdade ano que vem.

Subject + Will + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Negative

Will you talk to her?Você vai falar com ela?

Will + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)

Interrogative

It won’t rain.Não vai chover.

Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)


Will

311

Tell people what to do

Will you behave now?Você vai se comportar agora?

Make an offer / a proposal

Will you marry me?Você quer se casar comigo?

Promises

I will always be with you.Eu sempre estarei com você.

Willingness and Decisions

I’ll (I + will) get the door.Eu vou abrir a porta.

I will quit smoking.Eu vou parar de fumar.

WILLUses

WILLUses

In the interrogative, we can use will to tell people what to do or to make proposals. We can also use it for promises in aff irmative and negative sentences.

Will is commonly used to express willingness and decisions about the future that we make at the moment we speak.


312

You’ll have to attend driving classes to get your driver’s license.Você terá que fazer aulas de direção para tirar a carteira de motorista.

Refusal

I won’t (will + not) talk to her.Eu não vou falar com ela.

She won’t talk to anybody.Ela não vai falar com ninguém.

Will is also used to refer to things that are inevitable.

It can be used to express refusal in the negative form.

WILLUses

WILLInevitability

Now you know that will is a modal auxiliary verb, and you are familiar with its structures and common uses.


Version 4.0

People Management - online.wiseup.com

Documents

Transcript of People Management - online.wiseup.com